P63x EN M Aq6 610-622-630 Vol 1 PDF

MiCOM
P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN M/Aq6
Version
P631
P632
P633
P634
-305/306/307/308
-403/404/405/406/407/408
-610/611/620/621/622/630
-305/306/307/308
-403/404/405/406/407/408
-610/611/620/621/622/630
-305/306/307/308
-404/405/406/407/408/409/410/411/412
-610/611/620/621/622/630
-305/306/307/308
-403/404/405/406/407/408
-610/611/620/621/622/630
Technical Manual
Content
P63x/EN M/Ca4
P63x/EN AD/Ak6
P63x/EN AD/Am6
P63x/EN AD/An6
P63x/EN AD/Aq6
Volume 1 of 2
(-610)
(-611/620)
(-621)
(-622)
(-630)
MiCOM
P631/P632/P633/P634
Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN M/Ca4
(AFSV.12/09701 D)
Version
P631
P632
P633
P634
-305
-305
-305
-305
Technical Manual
-403/404
-403/404
-404/405/406
-403/404
-610
-610
-610
-610
Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors
are used, wire end ferrules must be employed.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification
is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and
may render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being
connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to
energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note:
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In
the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the
appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric,
including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the
contents of the operating manual.
Modifications After Going to Press
P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
11
12
Contents
Application and Scope
1-1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.10
2.11
2.12
Technical Data
Conformity
General Data
Tests
Type tests
Routine Tests
Environmental Conditions
Inputs and Outputs
Interfaces
Information Output
Settings
Deviations
Deviations of the Operate Values
Deviations of the Timer Stages
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Recording Functions
Power Supply
Current Transformer Specifications
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
13
Contents
(continued)
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.5.1
3.4.5.2
5.4.5.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.8
3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.10
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.11.5
3.11.6
3.11.7
3.11.8
3.11.9
3.11.10
3.11.11
3.11.12
3.11.13
14
Operation
Modular Structure
Operator-Machine Communication
Configuration of the Measured
(Function Group LOC)
Value Panels
Serial Interfaces
PC interface
(Function Group PC)
Communication Interface
(Function Group COMM1)
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
Communication Interface 2
UCA2 Communication Interface
IEC 61850 Communication
Interface
Interface
Generic Object Oriented
Substation Event
Generic Substation State Event
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization
Configuration and Operating Mode
of the Binary Inputs
Measured data input
Direct Current Input
Input for Connection of a
Resistance Thermometer
Configuration, Operating Mode,
and Blocking of the Output Relays
Measured data output
BCD Measured Data Output
Analog Measured Data Output
Output of External Measured
Data
Configuration and Operating Mode
of the LED Indicators
Main Functions of the P63x
Conditioning of the Measured
values
Phase Reversal Function
Selection of the Residual Current
to be Monitored
Forming a Virtual Transformer End
Operating Data Measurement
Configuring and Enabling the
Protection Functions
Activation of Dynamic Parameters
Multiple Blocking
Multiple Signaling of the
Measuring Circuit Monitoring
Function
Blocked / Faulty
Starting Signals and Tripping
Logic
Time Tagging and Clock
Synchronization
Resetting Mechanisms
(Function Group COMM2)

(Function Group UCA2)
(Function groups IEC,
GOOSE and GSSE)
(Function Group IEC)
3-18
3-21
3-22
(Function Group GOOSE)
3.25
(Function Group GSSE)

(Function Group IRIGB)
(Function Group INP)
3-27
3-29
3-30
(Function Group MEASI)
3-31
3-32
3-36
(Function Group OUTP)
3-37
(Function Group MEASO)
3-40
3-43
3-45
3-51
(Function Group LED)
3-52
(Function Group MAIN)
3-56
3-56
3-7
3-7
3-9
3-22
3-60
3-62
3-64
3-66
3-79
3-81
3-82
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-90
3-92
Contents
(continued)
3.11.14
3-24
Assigning Communications
Interfaces to Physical
Communications Channels
Test mode
Parameter Subset Selection
Self-Monitoring
Operating Data Recording
Monitoring Signal Recording
Overload Data Acquisition
Overload Recording
Fault Data Acquisition
Fault Recording
Differential Protection
Ground Differential Protection (Br:
Restricted earth fault protection)
Definite-Time Overcurrent
Protection
Inverse-Time Overcurrent
Protection
Thermal Overload Protection
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
Time-Voltage Protection
Over-/Underfrequency Protection
Overfluxing Protection
Current Transformer Supervision
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
3.30
3.31
Limit Value Monitoring

Limit Value Monitoring of Phase
Currents
Programmable Logic
3.11.15
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.32
3-93
(Function Group PSS)

(Function Group SFMON)
(Function Group OP_RC)
(Function Group MT_RC)
(Function Group OL_DA)
(Function Group OL_RC)
(Function Group FT_DA)
(Function Group FT_RC)
(Function Group DIFF)
(Function Groups REF_1
to REF_3)
(Function Groups DTOC1
to DTOC3)
(Function Groups IDMT1
to IDMT3)
(Function Groups THRM1
and THRM2)
(Function Group V<>)
(Function Group f<>)
(Function Group V/f)
(Function Group CTS)
(Function Groups MCM_1
to MCM_4)
(Function Group LIMIT)
(Function Groups LIM_1 to
LIM_3)
(Function Group LOGIC)
3-94
3-95
3-97
3-100
3-101
3-102
3-105
3-108
3-116
3-122
3-145
3-157
3-167
3-183
3-193
3-196
3-202
3-210
3-218
3-221
3-224
3-227
15
Contents
(continued)
16
4
4.1
4.2
Design
Designs
Modules
4-1
4-1
4-9
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
Installation and Connection

Unpacking and Packing
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
Location Requirements
Installation
Protective and Operational Grounding
Connection
Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Connecting the IRIG-B Interface
Connecting the Serial Interfaces
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-18
5-18
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.5.8
6.5.9
Local Control Panel

Display and Keypad
Changing between Display Levels
Display Illumination
Control at the Panel Level
Control at the Menu Tree Level
Navigation in the Menu Tree
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
Change-Enabling Function
Changing Parameters
Setting a List Parameter
Memory Readout
Resetting
Password-Protected Control Actions
Changing the Password
6-1
6-2
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-19
6-20
6-21
7
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.3.1
7.1.3.2
7.1.3.3
Settings
Parameters
Device Identification
Configuration Parameters
Function Parameters
Global
General Functions
Parameter Subsets
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-6
7-50
7-50
7-55
7-67
Contents
(continued)
8
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.1.1
8.1.1.2
8.1.1.3
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Information and Control Functions

Operation
Cyclic Values
Measured Operating Data
Physical State Signals
Logic State Signals
Control and Testing
Events
Event Counters
Measured Event Data
Event Recording
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-8
8-15
8-33
8-37
8-38
8-38
8-39
8-42
9
9.1
9.2
Commissioning
Safety Instructions
Commissioning Tests
9-1
9-1
9-3
10
Troubleshooting
10-1
11
Maintenance
11-1
12
Storage
12-1
13
Accessories and Spare Parts
13-1
14
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
Order Information
Order Information for P631 in 40TE case
Order Information for P633 in 40TE or 84TE case
14-1
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
Appendix
A Glossary
B Signal List
C Terminal connection diagrams
D Overview of Changes
Address list:
See chapters 7, 8 and 10, as well as the MiCOM S1 / S&R-103
support software.
17
18
1 Application and Scope
The P63x differential protection devices are designed for the fast and selective shortcircuit protection of transformers, motors and generators and of other two-, three- or
four-winding end arrangements.
The MiCOM P63x range features fast three-stage differential protection by applying a
tripping characteristic with two knee points and two high value settable differential
current thresholds to enable rapid tripping in conjunction with inrush, overfluxing and
through-stabilization. Amplitude and vector group matching is made by just entering the
nominal values of each transformer end and the associated current transformers.
A new (optional) overreaching current measuring circuit monitoring function will prevent
unwanted tripping by differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary circuit.
When considering 1 circuit breaker arrangements and ring busbar arrangements it is
also possible to define a virtual end, where phase currents and the residual current from
two freely-selectable ends may be added geometrically (vector sum).
A phase reversal function is available for applications in pumped storage power stations.
In a device type where protection functions are available more than once they may each
be freely assigned to individual winding ends.
Moreover there are numerous backup protection and automatic control functions
available.
The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter
subsets in order to adapt the protection device to different operating and power system
management conditions.
1-1

(continued)
General functions
General functions are complete function groups, which may be individually configured or
cancelled, depending on the application (e.g. included in or excluded from the devices
configuration).
An exception is the M A I N function, which is always visible.
A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:
Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu.
Communication functions and measured value functions may also be configured or
excluded.
This concept provides a wide choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme can be made.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes it
possible to accommodate special applications.
1-2

(continued)
General Functions
87
DIFF
Differential protection
P631
P632
P633
P634
2 ends
2 ends
3 ends
4 ends
> Three-stage differential protection

> Amplitude and vector group matching
> Residual current filtering
> Tripping characteristic with two knee
points
> Inrush stabilization
> Overfluxing stabilization
> Through stabilization
87 G
REF_x
Ground differential protection (Br:

Restricted earth fault protection)
50
DTOCx
Definite-time overcurrent protection
51
IDMTx
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
49
THRMx
Thermal overload protection
27 / 59
V<>
Time-voltage protection
81 O/U
f<>
Over-/underfrequency protection
24
U_f
Overfluxing protection
CTS
Current transformer supervision
optional
optional
optional
optional
MCM_x
Measuring-circuit monitoring
LIMIT, LIM_x
Limit value monitoring
LOGIC
Programmable logic
Communication Functions
COMM1, COMM2
2 information interfaces
IRIGB
IRIG-B
IEC, GOOSE, GSSE
IEC 61850 communications protocol
Input/output functions
INP / OUTP
Binary signal inputs / Output relays (maximum number)
Measured Value Functions

MEASI / MEASO
Analog input / output

(20 mA and resistance thermometer inputs, 2 x 20 mA
outputs)
Measuring inputs
Phase currents
Resultant current and neutral-point current
Voltage
P63x
options
P631
P632
P633
P634
4 / 14
34 / 22
40 / 30
34 / 22
P631
P632
P633
P634
optional
optional
optional
P631
P632
P633
P634
2x3
-
2x3
2
1
3x3
3
1
4x3
3
1
1-3

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the listed features and extensive self-monitoring, the P63x offers the
following global functions:
Global functions
PSS
Parameter subset selection

System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing
and operation
OP_RC
Operating data recording

(time-tagged event logging)
Overload recording (time-tagged event logging)
Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point in time during a fault
Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value
recording of the three phase currents, the residual currents, the three
phase-to-ground voltages, the neutral-point displacement voltage and the
reference voltage before, during and after a fault).
OL_DA
OL_RC
FT_DA
FT_RC
Further functions
Further functions
1-4
MAIN
DVICE
Main function
Device
LED
LOC
PC
LED indicators
Local control panel
PC link
SFMON
MT_RC
Comprehensive self-monitoring

(continued)
Functional diagram
Communication
Iph
COMM1
COMM2
Inter
MiCOM
IEC
to SCADA / Substation control / RTU / Modem ...

via RS485 or Optical Fibre
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
resp.
via RJ45 or Fibre Optics using IEC 61850
IRIG-B
Self
Monitoring
LOGIC
LIM-3
LIM-2
LIM-1
Recording
and
Data
Acquisition
Metering
Overload rec.
Fault rec.
V
IY,a
27, 59
V<>
81
f<>
24
V/f
IY,b
Iph
IY,c
87
DIFF
87G
REF_3
50
DTOC-3
51
IDMT-3
87G
REF_2
50
DTOC-2
51
IDMT--2
49
THRM2
BC _3
87G
REF_1
50
DTOC-1
51
IDMT--1
49
THRM1
BC_2
BC_4
BC_1
Iph
Iph
Ivirtual
RTD,mA
mA_OP
always available
optional or specific
Transformer Differential
Protection P63x
1-5

(continued)
Design
Inputs and outputs
The MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 protection devices are modular in design.
The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum case and electrically
interconnected via one analog p/c board and one digital p/c board.
The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P63x can be set
with the function parameters.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an option
binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range.
The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 VDC
version is also available.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100
resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero
suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via
20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured values (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available,
a selectable measured value can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
1-6

(continued)
Control and display
Local control panel

17 LED indicators,
12 with user-definable functional assignment
PC interface
Communication interfaces (optional)
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first communication interface, the numerical protection device can be wired
either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system.
The first communication interface is optionally available with a switcheable protocol
(per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier) or as an
IEC 61850 interface.
The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103
only) is designed for remote control.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input.
1-7

(continued)
Overview of all
function groups
IDMT1:
IDMT2:
IDMT3:
OUTP:
OP_RC:
DIFF:
REF_1:
REF_2:
REF_3:
INP:
f<>:
DVICE:
GOOSE:
LIMIT:
MAIN:
LIM_1:
LIM_2:
LIM_3:
GSSE:
IEC:
IRIGB:
COMM1:
COMM2:
LED:
LOGIC:
MEASO:
MEASI:
MCM_1:
MCM_2:
MCM_3:
MCM_4:
PC:
PSS:
SFMON:
CTS:
FT_RC:
FT_DA:
THRM1:
THRM2:
V<>:
V/f:
OL_RC:
OL_DA:
DTOC1:
DTOC2
DTOC3:
MT_RC:
UCA2:
LOC:
1-8
P631
P632
P633
P634
Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1

Binary outputs
Differential protection
Ground differential protection 1
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection 1)
Binary input
Over-/underfrequency protection
Device
Generic Object Orientated Substation Events
(as of P63x 610)
Limit value monitoring
Main function
Limit value monitoring 1
IEC Generic Substation Status Events
(as of P63x 610)
IEC 61850 Communication (as of P63x 610)
IRIG-B interface
Communication interface 1
Communication interface 2 (as of P63x 602)
LED indicators
Logic
Measured data output
Measured data input
Measuring-circuit monitoring 1 (as of P63x 602)
PC link
Self-monitoring
Current transformer supervision (as of P63x 606)
Fault recording
Fault data acquisition
Thermal overload protection 1
Thermal overload protection 2
Time-voltage protection
Overfluxing protection (as of P63x 602)
Overload recording
Overload data acquisition
Definite-time overcurrent protection 1
Monitoring signal recording
Utility Communication Architecture 2.0
(P63x 604/-605/-606 only)
9
9
9
9
9
-
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Local control panel
2 Technical Data
2
2.1
Notice
Declaration of conformity
Conformity
Applicable to P631 / P632 / P634, version -305 -403/404/-610 and

P633 version -305-404/405/406-610.
(Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.)
The products designated P631, P632, P633 and P634 Transformer Differential
Protection Devices have been designed and manufactured in compliance with European
standards EN 60255-6 and EN 60010-1 and with the EMC Directive and the Low
Voltage Directive issued by the Council of the European Community.
2.2
General device data
Technical Data
General Data
Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical 30
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case
(IP 10 for ring-terminal connection)
Weight
40TE case: Approx. 7 kg; 84TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections
See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5).
Terminals
PC interface (X6):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Communication Interface:
Optical fibers (X7 and X8):
or
Leads (X9 and X10):
F-SMA optical fiber connection

per IEC 60874-2 and DIN 47258 (for plastic fibers)
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10-1 and DIN 47254-1 (for glass fibers)
(ST is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections
up to 1.5 mm.
or (for IEC 61850 only via

100 Mbit/s Ethernet board) (X13): Glass fiber SC per IEC 60874-14-4 and RJ45 wire
IRIG-B Interface (X11):
BNC plug.
2-1
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Current Measuring Inputs:

Threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection: M5,
self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross-sections 4 mm2
or
Threaded terminals for ring-terminal connection: M4
Other Inputs and Outputs:
Threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection: M3,
self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross-sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
or
Threaded terminals for ring-terminal connection: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances
Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2.3
2.3.1
Type tests
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Tests
Type Tests
All tests per EN 60263-6 or IEC 60255-26.

Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test
Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3
Contact discharge, single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204 , severity level 3
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %
For this EN, ENV or IEC standard, the DIN EN, DINV ENV or DIN IEC edition,
respectively, was used in the test.
2-2
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per IEC 60255-22-4, Class B.
Power supply: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 1 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Per EN 61000-4-4 , severity level 4:
Power supply: Amplitude: 4 kV, Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz and 5 kHz
Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
Source impedance: 50 W
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test
Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 s
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 s
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min
Source impedance: 12 / 42
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances
Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
Test voltage: 10 V
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
Frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity
Per IEC 255-11
12 %
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5.
2 kV AC, 60 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 s
Time to half-value: 50 s
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500 W
2-3
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness
1(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1
Frequency range in operation:
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 1 ,
5 g for 11 ms,
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
test severity class 1 ,
15 g for 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness
2(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2
Frequency range in operation:
10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 2,
10 g for 11 ms;
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
15 g for 11 ms
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport),
10 g for 16 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
(**)
Mechanical robustness 2:
Valid for with delivery date as of May 2005, if one of the following case variants is
used:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Surface-Mounted Case
2-4
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3.2
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5
2.2 kV AC, 1 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test
100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.4
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5C to +55C (23F to 131F)
Storage and transit: -25 C to +70 C (-13 F to +158 F)
Ambient Humidity Range
75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40 C (104F), condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
P63X/EN M/Ca4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
2-5
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.5
Measuring inputs
Inputs and Outputs
Current
Rated current: 1 or 5 A AC (settable).
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.13 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous: 4 Inom
for 10 s: 30 Inom
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom
Voltage
Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz
All other protection functions:
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Overfluxing protection: 0.5 to 1.5 fnom
Binary signal inputs
Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option

18 V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V to19 V
Special variant with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal supply voltage
(i.e. definitively ,low for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively ,high for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)
"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC
Power consumption per input
Standard variant:
VA = 19 ... 110 V DC: 0.5 W 30 %,
VA > 110 V DC: VA 5 mA 30 %.
Special variant:
Vin > Switching threshold: VA 5 mA 30 %.
Notes
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.
2-6
2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface
Direct current input
Resistance thermometer
inputs
Output relays
BCD Measured Data

Output
Direct Current Output
Minimum / maximum input voltage level

(peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp.
Input impedance: 33 k at 1 kHz.
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Input resistance: 100
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable)
Resistance thermometer: For analog module, PT 100 permitted only.

Mapping curve as per IEC 751.
Value range: -40.0 to +215.0C
3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted
Open-circuit monitoring: > +215 C and < -40 C
Rated voltage:
Continuous current:
Short-duration current:
Making capacity:
Breaking capacity:
250 V DC, 250 V AC

5A
30 A for 0.5 s
1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms
4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4
Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399

Value range: 0 to 20 mA
Permissible load: 0 to 500
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
2-7
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6
Local control panel
Interfaces
Input or output:
via seven keys and a 4 x 20 character-LCD display
State and fault signals:
17 LED indicators (13 permanently assigned, 4 freely configurable)
PC interface
Communication interfaces
1 and 2
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
The communication module can be provided with up to two communication channels,

depending on the module variant. Channel 1 is designed for twisted pair connection or
fiber optic connection, whereas Channel 2 is intended for twisted pair connection only.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103,
IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS or DNP 3.0 (as of version P63x -602 Courier) can be set.
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
For Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Transmission rate
Communication Protocol
BA-no. -910
(one channel)
300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable)
IEC 60870-5-103
BA-no. -921
(two channels)
300 to 64,000 baud

(adjustable for COMM1)
300 to 57,600 baud
Can be set by user for one

channel
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
2-8
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m
Transmission rate
BA-no. -910
(one channel)
IEC 60870-5-103
BA-no. -922
(two channels)
300 to 64,000 baud

300 to 57,600 baud

channel
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Distance to be bridged:1) max. 400 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125
Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 1,400 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 or G 62.5/125
Transmission rate
BA-no. -910
(one channel)
IEC 60870-5-103
BA-no. -924
(two channels)
300 to 64,000 baud

300 to 57,600 baud

channel
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
2-9
2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface
Data transmission using

the IEC 61850 protocol
B122 format
Amplitude modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD-coded variation data (daily)
Order ext. No. -936:

Interface to connect a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber-SC and RJ45 wire
or
Order ext. No. -937:
Interface to connect a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber-SC and RJ45 wire
For Wire Leads
per RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged: Max. 100 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125
Optical output: min. -20 dBm
The second communication interface (RS 485 connection, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) is
also available.
2-10
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7
Information Output
Counters, measured data, signals and LED indications: see Chapter 8.

2.8
Typical characteristic data
Settings
Main function
Minimum output pulse duration for a trip command:
0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Operate time at Id = 10 Idiff> with inrush restraint disabled, or at Id > Idiff>>>:
at least 13 ms, typically 15 ms.
Operate time at Id = 2.5 Idiff> with inrush restraint disabled:
Operate time at Id = 2.5 Idiff> with inrush restraint enabled:
Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection
Operate time including output relay (measured value from 0 to 2-fold operate value):
40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured value drops from 2-fold operate value to 0):
Starting resetting ratio: Approx. 0.95
Operate time including output relay (measured value from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured value from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
Reset time (measured value from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value
or measured value from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (adjustable)
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
2-11
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9
2.9.1
Definitions
Deviations
Deviations of the Operate Values
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient
temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Measuring system
Deviation for Idiff : 0.2 Iref: 5 %
Harmonic blocking: 10 %
Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
Deviation: 10 %
Ground differential
protection (Br: Restricted earth
fault protection)
Definite-time and inversetime overcurrent protection

Thermal Overload
Protection
Frequency protection
df/dt protection
Direct current input
Resistance thermometer
2-12
Measuring system
Deviation for Idiff : 0.2 Iref: 5 %
Deviation: 5 %
Deviation: 5 %
Operate Values
fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: 30 mHz
fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: 40 mHz
Operate Values
fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: 0.1 Hz/s
fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: 0.1 Hz/s
Deviation: 3 %
Deviation: : 3 %
Deviation: 1 %
Deviation: 2 or 1 %
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Analog Measured Data

Output
Deviation: 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: 1 %
2.9.2
Definitions
Deviations of the Timer Stages
temperature 20 C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Definite-time stages
Deviation: 1 % or + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I 2 Iref: 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
or for IEC 'Extremely Inverse', thermal overload and V/f characteristics:
7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it is used

for reporting purposes. This function is calculated approximately one time per second.
Therefore, it is not accurate enough to provide meaningful data for the time deviation.
2-13
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3
Definitions
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
temperature 20 C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Measuring Input Currents

Deviation: 1 %
Measuring Input Voltage
Deviation: 0.5 %
Internally formed restraining and differential currents
Deviation: 2 %
Frequency
Deviation: 10 mHz
Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output
Deviation: 1 %
Temperature
Deviation: 2 C
Fault data
Phase and Star point currents

Deviation: 3 %
Restraining and Differential Currents
Deviation: 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:

Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval 1 min):
Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: 1 ms
2-14
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10 Recording Functions

Organization of the Recording Memories:
Operating data memory
Monitoring signal memory
Overload memory
Fault memory
Scope for signals:
All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different

logic state signals
Depth:
The 100 most recent signals
Scope for signals:
All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of

1024 different logic state signals
Depth:
Up to 30 signals
Number: The 8 most recent overload events

Scope for signals:
All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of

1024 different logic state signals
Depth:
200 entries per overload event
Number: The 8 most recent fault events

Scope for signals:
Signals:
All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals
Depth for fault values:
Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth for signals Signals:

200 entries per fault event
Depth for fault values:
Max. number of periods per fault set by the user; 820 periods
in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s
(for fnom = 60 Hz)
2-15
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Resolution of the Recorded Data

Signals
Fault values
Phase and Star point

currents
Voltage
Time resolution: 1 ms
Time resolution: 20 sampled values per period
Dynamic range:
Amplitude resolution
33 Inom
at Inom = 1 A: 2 mA r.m.s.
at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mA r.m.s.
Dynamic range:
Amplitude resolution:
150 V AC
9.2 mVrms
2.11 Power Supply

Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:

48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC or 24 V DC
(ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:
0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration:
For case:
40TE
84TE
Relays de-energized,
approx.:
13 W
13 W
Relays energized
approx.:
29 W
37 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms

Permitted supply interruption: 50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC
2-16
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications

The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
'
Vsat = (R nom + R i ) n Inom R op + R i k I1,
max
with:
Vsat:
I'1,max:
Inom:
n:
k:
Rnom:
Rop
Ri
saturation voltage (IEC knee point)

non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
rated secondary current
rated overcurrent factor
over-dimensioning factor
rated burden
actual connected operating burden
internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
'
Vsat R op + R i k I1,
max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:
n
(R op + R i )
(R nom + R i )
'
I1,
max
Inom
(Pop + Pi )
(Pnom + Pi )
'
I1,
max
Inom
With
2
Pnom = R nom Inom
2
Pop = R op Inom
2
Pi = R i Inom
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max 1 + T1
with:
:
T1:
system angular frequency

system time constant
2-17
2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the overdimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function
is guaranteed under the given conditions.
The transformer differential protection device is equipped with a saturation discriminator.
This function will generate a stabilizing blocking signal if a differential current occurs as a
consequence of transformer saturation with an external fault (in contrast to an internal
fault). For the passing maximum fault current in the case of an external fault,
overdimensioning is, therefore, obviated.
For the maximum fault current with an internal fault, static saturation up to a maximum
saturation factor fS of 4 is permissible. This corresponds to an overdimensioning
factor k of 0.25.
The implementation of these requirements is comparatively unproblematic as
transformer differential protection would require overdimensioning in accordance with the
total fault clearing time, which includes the total circuit-breaker open time for an external
fault.
Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P.
2-18
3 Operation
3
3.1
Operation
Modular Structure
The P63x, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P63x.
3-1
Basic hardware structure
3-1
3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities electrically isolated are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals internally generated by the device are connected to the external plant via
contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to
the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required
internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to
the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for
the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital
converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to
the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the
processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals,
generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X
via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device
communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the
processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated
PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2
3 Operation
(continued)
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:
Integrated local control panel (LOC)
PC interface
Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:
Parameters branch
Operation branch
Events branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces
to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the
process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that
the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the users choice. Chapters 7, 8 and 10 describe the settings, signals and
measured values available with the P63x. The possible setting values can be found in
the P63x's data model file associated with the PC operating program (MiCOM S1).
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for
specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to
operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following a short circuit in
the system. Thus the P63x provides the measured data relevant for the prevailing
conditions.
3-3
3 Operation
(continued)
3.3
Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)
The P63x offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at
a given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured
values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the
event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at
least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the
Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. If more measured values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to
the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r
P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-2
3-4
Operation Panel
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-3
Fault panel
3-5
3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs.
In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-4
3-6
Overload Panel
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4
Serial Interfaces
The P63x has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is

optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels, depending on
the design version. Communication between the P63x and the control stations
computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible
through all the P63x's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for
two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1
(COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section
"Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication
channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be
active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P63x if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as
the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
It will only be enabled again after the PC interface Time-out has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P63x, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way
the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see
section "Main Functions").
3.4.1
PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P63x and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P63x.
There is a support software available as an accessory for P63x control (see Chapter 13).
3-7
3 Operation
(continued)
3-5
3-8
PC interface settings
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2
Communication Interface (Function Group COMM1)
Communication between the P63x and the control stations computer is done through
the communication interface. Depending on the design version of communications
module A (see "Technical Data") there are several interface protocols available.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is always supported. The following user-selected
interface protocols are available for use with the P63x:
IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission

protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition,
a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
P63X/EN M/Ba4-S // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
3-9
3 Operation
(continued)
3-6
3-10
Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol

3 Operation
(continued)
3-7
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
3-11
3 Operation
(continued)
3-8
3-12
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol

3 Operation
(continued)
3-9
Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-13
3 Operation
(continued)
3-10
3-14
Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
3 Operation
(continued)
3-11
Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
3-15
3 Operation
(continued)
3-12
3-16
Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
3-13
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is

possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via setting parameters.
Checking spontaneous signals
3-17
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.3
Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.
3-18
3 Operation
(continued)
3-14
Settings for communication interface 2
3-19
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via setting parameters.
Spontan.
signal start
Spontan.
signal end
3-15
3-20
Checking spontaneous signals
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.4
UCA2 Communication Interface (Function Group UCA2)
This function group is available only with the P63x -604/-605/-606 device.
(As of device version P63x 610, the IEC 61850 communication interface is available:
it uses function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE. A description is provided in the
following section).
The communication protocol Utility Communication Architecture 2.0 is implemented with
the UCA2 function group and the Ethernet module (in the 10 MHz and 100 MHz
variants).
Function group UCA2 is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!). Pending the implementation of the IEC 61850 protocol,
the use of UCA2 is reserved for specific projects.
The UCA2 addresses for setting, information and control functions are described in
chapters 7 and 8.
(See also the detailed description of the UCA2 protocol implementation:
P54x_EN_UC_B42.pdf).
3-21
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5
IEC 61850 Communication Interface

(Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
These function groups are available only with the P63x -610 device.
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and the
Ethernet module.
Note:
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1 IEC 61850 Communication Interface (Function Group IEC)
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard.
The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability
of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company
or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with
the P63x, is available:
3-22
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are
to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of

available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of

available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter

addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces
is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter
I E C : E t h e r n e t m e d i a . The optical interface of the Ethernet module is currently
available with an SC connector (100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm). A variant with an ST
connector is being developed. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2).
Notes:
The P63x may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
The Ethernet module can only be applied in conjunction with the processor
module P (included in current hardware version) with the item number 9650
135 or other processor modules available in the near future. When upgrading
older P63x hardware versions with an Ethernet module, which is technically
possible, it must be kept in mind that such units are usually equipped with the
processor module P, item number 0337 875. But this processor module P
does not support the Ethernet module and therefore the communications
protocol per IEC 61850 is also not supported. If such an upgrade is carried
out the processor module P must be exchanged. The processor module item
number can be checked by reading the device identification setting at
DVICE: Module var. slot 1.
Activating and Enabling
The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n

g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
IEC: General enable USER.
The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e
c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online at
MAIN: Device on-line.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is

common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices.
A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P63x can supply up to 16 clients with information.
3-23
3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard
for Ethernet. Here the P63x functions as a SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization
occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network,
and in the second operating mode the P63x requests the device specific time signal
during a settable cycle.
Fault Transmission
Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas

normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a transfer
trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will therefore
replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and
IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple
configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE
enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more
extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the
opposite side. With IEC-GOOSE the P63x at this time supports sending and receiving of
binary information.
Communication with the

Operating Program
MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating
program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is
accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client
communication and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.
3-24
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic
devices) in a local network, the P63x provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as
defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure
transmission for trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other
signals.
"Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
Function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter

G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
GOOSE: General enable USER.
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command
I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is
switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition function group IEC must
be configured and enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE the P63x can transmit up to 32 logic binary state signals. Selection of
binary state signals is made by setting
G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The assignment of data object
indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the
assignment to GOOSE outputs.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state
signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending
time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after
2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at
2-second intervals.
3-25
3 Operation
(continued)
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the

Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through parameter settings. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration
Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".
GOOSE-DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification:
Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

VLAN Identifier: 0
VLAN Priority: 4
Application ID: 12288
Goose ID: "Local IED"
DataSet Ref. : "Local IEDSystem/LLNO$GooseST"
DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range:
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
64Z6090A_EN
3-16
3-26
Basic structure of sent GOOSE
3 Operation
(continued)
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic state signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 16) is
made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received from an external device the "Goose Message" must
be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the Goose ID, the Application
ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the
data attribute index through parameters, the required information from the chosen
GOOSE will be selected. The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN
identifier and Dataset Configuration Revision that are also included in the GOOSE
received.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective
default values G O O S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t o r G O O S E : E x t . D e v . n d e f a u l t
(n = 1 to 16).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic
devices) in a local network, the P63x provides, as an additional functionality, the function
group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as trip commands,
blocking, enabling and other signals.
Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter G S S E : F u n c t i o n

g r o u p G S S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
GSSE: General enable USER.
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e
c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
3-27
3 Operation
(continued)
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting
G S S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which
will transmit this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will
be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs
at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for
the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set
with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to
the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then
GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic
binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32) is
made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required
information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ) .
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(G S S E : b i t p a i r ) .
Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GSSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-28
3 Operation
(continued)
3.5
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P63x can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P63x, the P63x calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling or enabling the
IRIG-B interface
Synchronization readiness
3-17
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.

If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P63x checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P63x. If the P63x does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
IRIG-B interface
3-29
3 Operation
(continued)
3.6
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P63x has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The functions that will be activated in the P63x by triggering these binary signal inputs
are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The typical response time is
< 10 ms, although for reliability it is recommended that the initiating signal is maintained
for at least 30 ms.
Configuring the binary
inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands
should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O module as these have
an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
Operating mode of the

binary inputs
3-18
3-30
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a
voltage should be interpreted as the logic '1' signal. The display of the state of a binary
signal input 'low' or 'high' is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the
signal input.
Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-6
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7
Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
The P63x has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed
to the P63x through one of the inputs. The other input is designed to connect a
resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is
conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating
value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and
monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
measured data input
function
3-19
The measured data input can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
3-31
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.1
Direct Current Input
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured the temperature, for
example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured
quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that the
measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may be
necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with
a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair M EASI: ID C x and
M EASI: ID C ,l i n x, the user specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the
current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting
points, called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin
diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two
interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-20). Up to
20 interpolation points are available to implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a monotonically
increasing curve is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If an invalid setting is entered, the
S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C signal will be generated.
IDClin / IDC,nom
1.2
1.1
IDClin20
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
IDClin1
0
0
0.1
0.2
IDC1
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.6
IDC/ IDC,nom
IDC20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266A_EN
3-20
3-32
Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20
0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4
0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3
0.3
IDC,lin2
0.2
IDC,lin1
0.1
0
0
0.1
0.2
IDC1
0.3
0.4
0.5
IDC2
0.6
IDC3
0.7
0.8
0.9
IDC4
1.1
IDC20
Enable IDC p.u.
3-21
1.2
IDC / IDC,nom
D5Z52KEB
D5Z52KEB _EN
Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken
line)
Zero suppression
Open-circuit and overload

monitoring
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct

current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the
current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of 0 .
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold, M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the M E A S I : O p e n c i r c .
2 0 m A i n p . signal is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading.
If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t
signal is issued.
3-33
3 Operation
(continued)
3-22
3-34
Analog direct current input

3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-23
Scaling of the linearized measured value
3-35
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.2
Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer
This input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping

curve, R = f(T), of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in the IEC 751 standard.
If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no
further calibration is required.
Open-circuit monitoring
3-24
3-36
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n

c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.
Temperature measurement using a resistance thermometer
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely-configured by the user.
Configuration of the output
relays
Operating mode of the

output relays
Blocking the output relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually via a setting parameter, or by an appropriately configured binary signal
input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
The P63x offers the option of blocking all output relays via a setting parameter or by way
of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs.
In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e. relays in
a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in a normally
closed arrangement (NC) are triggered.
This does not apply to the relays associated with the signals
SF M O N : W a r n i n g ( r e l a y) or M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty. Self-monitoring alarms are
thus correctly indicated.
If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in chapter 10,
which will lead to a blocking of the protection), all output relays are reset regardless of
the set operating mode or signal configuration.
3-37
3 Operation
(continued)
3-25
3-38
Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays
For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a setting
parameter. Therefore the device must be switched to 'off-line'. Triggering persists for
the duration of the set hold time.
MAIN: Protection
enabled
No (off)
47Z1050A_EN
3-26
Testing the output relays
3-39
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9
Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measured values made available by the P63x can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as
direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD
output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not.
measured data output
function
3-27
3-40
The measured data output can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data

output
3-28
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that
the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function
M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input, then
the measured data output is always enabled.
Enabling measured data output
3-41
3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured

data output function
3-29
Scaling
3-42
BCD or analog output of measured values is terminated for the duration of the hold time
if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output is reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset
Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device's inherent setting
range.
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.1
The user can select a measured value for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.
The selected measured value is available in BCD form for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not measured,
then there is no output of a measured value.
Output of measured event
values
Output of measured
operating values
Scaling of BCD output
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is restarted. If the hold time has been set to 'blocked', the measured operating value that has
been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
The resolution for measured data output is defined by setting the scaling factor.
The scaling factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the
maximum measured value to be output. If this should occur or if the measured value is
outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for "Overflow" (all relays
triggered) is transmitted.
Mx,scal =
Mx,max
scaling factor
where:
Mx,scal : scaled measured value
Mx,max : maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
3-43
3 Operation
(continued)
3-30
3-44
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.2
Analogue output of measured data is two-channel.

The user can select two of the measured values available in the P63x for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be
defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring
instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d t i m e o u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured,
then there is no output of a measured value.
Output of measured event
values
Output of measured
operating values
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is
re-started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x o u t p u t ,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).
3-45
3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display
Measured value range to

be output
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range in
scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for
the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-31.
The measured value range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min:
minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measured value range to be output
Mx,max:
maximum value to be output
This measured value range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the S&R-103 - PC MiCOM S1
Support Software - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measured values
Range
Measured values of the

variable Mx
Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured

values
0 ... 1
Measured value to be
output
Range
Measured values with kneepoint to be output
Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measured values

with a scaled knee-point to
be output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max

with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set

values in the data model
3-46
"Scal. min. value Ax" ...

... "Scal. knee-point Ax" ...
... "Scal. max. value Ax"
3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range
The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
Measured values
Analog display values
Measured values in the

range "Measured values to
be output"
"AnOut min. val. A-x" ...

... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
...
... "AnOut max. val. A-x"
(Value A-x valid)
Measured values:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
"AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Measured values Mx:

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
"AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Measured values Mx:

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
"AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
3-47
3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measured value to be transmitted by channel A-1.

The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measured values
Range
Measured values of the

variable Mx
0 V ... 150 V

values
0 ... 1
Measured values to be
output
Range
Measured values with kneepoint to be output
2 V ...10 V... 100 V

values
0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67

with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measured values
Analog display values
Measured values in the

range "Measured values
to be output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
In this example the following device settings are selected:

/Parameter/Config. parameters/
3-48
Address
Description
Current value
056 020
031 074
053 000
MEASO: Function group MEASO

MEASO: General enable USER
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1
010 114
037 104
MEASO: Hold time output A-1

MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1
037 105
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1
037 106
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1
037 107
037 108
037 109
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1
With
Yes
MAIN:
Voltage A-B PU
1.00 s
0.013 (corresponds with
0.02 Vnom)
0.10 Vnom)
1.00 Vnom)
4 mA
16 mA
18 mA
3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current

that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines the
output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted.
By defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
monotonically increasing or decreasing curve is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not
allowed). If the setting was not properly entered, the signal SF M O N : In va l i d
s c a l i n g A- x will be issued.
Note:
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M AIN : D e vi c e
o n - l i n e is again switched on-line.
Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value18
Knee point
16
output value
14
12
10
8
6
Min.
output value 4
2
0
0
0.02
0.1
0,013
0,067
1.2
1.3
1.4
0,667
1.5 Vnom
1,0Mx,scal
D5Z52KFA
19Z5265A_EN
3-31
Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-49
3 Operation
(continued)
3-32
3-50

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.3
Output of External Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P63x via the communications interface.
MEASO: Output Value 1
These "external" measured values are output by the P63x either in BCD data form or as
load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or
the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-51
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
LED indicators
The P63x has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED indicators are
freely configurable.
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the freely configurable LED indicators
(example for H 5 : L ED : F c t. a s s i g n m . H 5 ). The same binary signal can be assigned
to several LED indicators, if required.
LED indicator
Label
Configuration
H1
'HEALTHY'
Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device

(supply voltage is present).
H 17
'EDIT MODE'
Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when the
device is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by pressing
the and keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and Keypad')
H2
'OUT OF SERVICE'
Permanently configured with function M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y .
H3
'ALARM'
Permanently configured with function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) .
H4
'TRIP'
As a standard LED indicator H 4 is configured

at M A I N : G e n . t r i p s i g n a l . The factory setting for this LED indicator
is shown in the terminal connection drawings included in the
documentation or the appendix.
H 5 to H 16
----
These 12 LED indicators are freely configurable.
The drawing below shows the layout of the LED indicators situated on the local control
panel.
3-52
3 Operation
(continued)
H4
TRIP
H5
H3
ALARM
H6
H2
OUT OF SERVICE
H7
H1
HEALTHY
H8
H17
EDIT MODE
H9
= CLEAR
= READ
= ENTER
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
64Z6000A_EN
3-33
Layout of the LED indicators
3-53
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the LED

indicators
3-54
The mode determines whether a logic "1" will light the LED, defined as a follower mode,
or whether the binary signal is inverted such that a logic zero will light the LED. Latching
is disabled either manually via a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured
binary signal input (see "Main Functions of the P63x"), at the onset of a new fault or of a
new system disturbance, depending on the selected operating mode.
3 Operation
(continued)
3-34
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
3-55
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)

3.11.1 Conditioning of the Measured values
The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P63x.
Furthermore, there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The measured
values are electrically isolated converted to normalized electronics levels. The
analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing. Depending
on the design version, the P63x has the following measuring inputs:
P631:
Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for two winding
ends of the transformer
P632:
Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for two winding
ends of the transformer
Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see Figure 3-36)
One voltage input
P633 and P634:
Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for three (P633)
or four (P634) winding ends of the transformer.
Current inputs for up to three neutral-point-to-ground connections (see Figure 3-35)
or, alternatively, for looping into ground connections of the phase current
transformers or for connection to a Holmgreen group.
One voltage input.
3-56
3 Operation
(continued)
3-35
Connection of the measured values to the P63x, connection of the fourth current transformer set to the transformers of the
neutral-point-to-ground connections
3-57
3 Operation
(continued)
3-36a
3-58
Connection of the measured values to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase
current transformers, Part 1 of 2
3 Operation
(continued)
3-36b
Connection of the measured values to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase
current transformers, Part 2 of 2
3-59
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.2 Phase Reversal Function

The phase reversal function is available as of version P63x -610. It is intended to protect
machines in pumped storage power stations that are operated either as motors or as
generators, depending on the demand. In such applications it is common practice to
swap two phases in order to facilitate the pumping operation. Because of this, the P63x
phase reversal function can maintain correct operation of all protection functions even
when the phase reversal switch is inside the protected zone.
The processing is done right after A/D conversion, such that the link between physical
transformer input and internal numerical signal will be swapped, depending on the
setting. (The measured values stored in the respective measured value memories are
swapped.) Thus all further processing of measured values and protection functions
remains unchanged.
Phase reversal can be set independently for each transformer end and in each
parameter subset. The parameters are included in function group 'MAIN' because phase
reversal affects not only the differential protection function (DIFF), but also the negative
sequence elements of Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent protection functions
(IDMTx, DTOCx) as well as Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) and MeasuringCircuit Monitoring (MCM_x) functions.
Description
Range of Values
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
010 200
010 201
010 202
010 203
MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx
010 204
010 205
010 206
010 207
MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx
010 208
010 209
010 210
010 211
MAIN: Phase reversal c PSx
010 212
010 213
010 214
010 215
MAIN: Phase reversal d PSx
No swap
A-B swapped
B-C swapped
C-A swapped
Using parameter subsets readily allows phase reversal to be activated via any control
interface (LOC, PC, COMMx) or via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Since the currently active parameter subset is shown on the LC-display and may be
recalled from the recordings, phase reversal information is accessible. There are
however applications where an additional display of a phase reversal may be useful.
Such would be the case when recordings by a P63x are to be compared with those by
other devices not featuring phase reversal (e.g. Backup overcurrent-time protection
device) and without knowledge of the P63x setting file. For this the following display is
used:
Description
036 220
MAIN: Phase reversal active
Range of Values
No
Yes
Phase reversal is active (Yes) when at least one of the setting parameters in the active
parameter subset has a value other than No swap.
The setting file must be viewed to determine which phases are swapped.
3-60
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase reversal

a PSx
[
*1
]
0
1
2
3
0: without
1: a-b
2: b-c
3: c-a
MAIN: Phase
reversal activ
[ 036 220 ]

b PSx
[
*2
]
0
1
2
3
0: without
1: a-b
2: b-c
3: c-a

c PSx
[
*3
]
0
1
2
3
*1
Parameter
set
set
set
set
0: without
1: a-b
2: b-c
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Phase
reversal a PSx
010 200
010 201
010 202
010 203
3: c-a
*2
set
set
set
set

d PSx
[
*4
]
0
Parameter
*3
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Phase
reversal b PSx
010 204
010 205
010 206
010 207
MAIN: Phase
reversal c PSx
010 208
010 209
010 210
010 211
3
0: without
1: a-b
2: b-c
3: c-a
*4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN: Phase
reversal d PSx
010 212
010 213
010 214
010 215
64Z6001 A_EN
3-37
Phase reversal function of the P63x
3-61
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.3 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored

For protection functions of the P632, P633 and P634 monitoring the residual current,
the user can select whether the device is to use the current derived from the three phase
currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer.
3-62
3 Operation
(continued)
3-38
Evaluation of residual current
3-63
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.4 Forming a Virtual Transformer End

The P633 and P634 offer the option of forming a new variable by combining the phase
currents or the residual currents from two or three ends of the transformer. The following
options are possible:
Forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents from two ends of
the transformer (options 1 to 6). Options 1 to 6 are shown in Figure 3-39.
Forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents from three ends of
the transformer (options 7 to 10).
Subtracting the phase currents or the residual currents from two ends of the
transformer (options 11 to 16). By subtraction (unstable) transverse differential
protection including time-overcurrent protection may be obtained.
3-64
3 Operation
(continued)
3-39
Forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents, options 1 to 6
3-65
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.5 Operating Data Measurement

The P63x has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured by the P63x during normal power system operation; quantities
derived from these measured values are also displayed. For the display of measured
values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower thresholds are not
exceeded, the value 'not measured' is displayed. The following measured values are
displayed:
Phase currents of all three phases of all four ends of the transformer
Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer
Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
Positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of all ends
Current IN derived by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents for each end of the
transformer
Current IY measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
Phase currents of all three phases of the virtual end of the transformer.
The virtual end is formed by adding the corresponding currents of two transformer
ends selected by the user at M AIN : C u r r e n t s u m m a ti o n . (See description in
previous section.)
Positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of the virtual end
Maximum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer
Minimum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer
Current IN of the virtual end of the transformer
Voltage
Frequency
Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer
Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer
Angle between derived IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a general
starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
3-66
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values
The measured values for the current are displayed both as per unit quantities referred to
the nominal current of the P63x and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the transformers connected to the P63x needs to
be set.
3-67
3 Operation
(continued)
Delayed maximum phase

current display
Stored maximum phase

current display
3-68
The P63x offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is
an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in Figure
3-40). The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have
reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l .
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-40). The stored maximum phase current is set to
the actual value of the delayed maximum phase current at
M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-40).
3 Operation
(continued)
3-40
Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display, end d (P634 only)
3-69
3 Operation
(continued)
3-41
3-70
Measured operating data for the phase currents, ends a to d
3 Operation
(continued)
3-42
Measured operating data for the residual currents, ends a to c
3-71
3 Operation
(continued)
3-43
3-72
Measured operating data for the residual current, end d (P634 only)
3 Operation
(continued)
3-44
Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current for the virtual end (formed by current summation,
P633 and P634 only, see Figure 3-39)
3-73
3 Operation
(continued)
Positive- and negativesequence currents
As of version P63x -606 the positive- and negative-sequence current measured values
of all ends (primary and per unit values) are determined continuously and displayed as
measured operating data:
z: End a
z: End b
z: End c
z: End d
MAIN: Current Ineg z prim.
005 125
005 129
005 136
005 140
M AIN : C u r r e n t Ip o s z p r i m .
005 127
005 134
005 138
005 146
MAIN: Current Ineg z p.u.
005 126
005 130
005 137
005 145
M AIN : C u r r e n t Ip o s z p .u .
005 128
005 135
005 139
005 147
As of version P63x -606 the positive- and negative-sequence current measured values
of the virtual end, formed by summation or subtraction of current values (primary and per
unit values), are also continuously determined and displayed as measured operating
data:
MAIN: Curr. Ineg,add p.u.
005 149
MAIN: Curr. Ipos,add p.u.
005 150
When the CB's contacts are open, it is also possible to force to zero the setting of small
positive- and negative-sequence current measured values if such measured values are
below additionally created settable thresholds.
3-74
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg
011 048
M AIN : M e a s .va l u e r e l . Ip o s
011 049
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage value
3-45
Measured voltage value
Frequency
3-46
The measured voltage value is displayed both as a per unit quantity referred to the
nominal voltage of the P63x and as a primary quantity. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer connected to the P63x
must be set.
The P63x determines the frequency from the voltage. This voltage needs to exceed a
minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined.
Frequency measurement
3-75
3 Operation
(continued)
Angle determination
The P63x determines the angle between the following currents if the associated currents
exceed the minimum threshold of 0.033 Inom:
Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer
Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer
Angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at the
transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) for each end of the transformer
3-47
3-76
Determination of the angle between the phase currents
3 Operation
(continued)
3-48
Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends
3-77
3 Operation
(continued)
3-49
3-78
Determination of the angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at transformer -Tx4
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.6 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions

The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by
configuring the available function range. By including the relevant protection functions in
the device configuration and cancelling all other protection functions, the user creates an
individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters, signals, and measured
values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control panel.
Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main
functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
Cancelling a protection
function
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.
None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or
an LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the 'Configuration' branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant for the device function to be cancelled. If, for
example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, the setting L IM IT : F u n c ti o n
g r o u p L I M I T is accessed and its value is set to 'Without'. To re-include the "LIMIT"
function in the device configuration, the same setting is accessed and its value is
changed to 'With'.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: In the following description of the
protection functions, it is presumed that this protection function is included in the
configuration.
3-79
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

protection function
Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a
function setting or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled
through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T and
M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When neither or only
one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as "Protection
externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible
i.e. both are at logic level = "1" then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
Note:
3-50
3-80
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T , the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y
is not issued.
Enabling or disabling protection
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.7 Activation of Dynamic Parameters

For several of the protection functions, it is possible to switch the duration of the set hold
time to other settings - the "dynamic parameters" through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, switching is effective while the binary
signal input is being triggered.
3-51
Activation of dynamic parameters
3-81
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.8 Multiple Blocking

Four multiple blockings may be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. Thereby the
functions defined by the selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
3-82
3 Operation
(continued)
3-52
Multiple Blocking
3-83
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.9 Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function

Signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring (MCMON) function are combined to
one signal in function group M AIN .
3-53
3-84
Signals issued by measuring circuit monitoring
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.10 Blocked / Faulty

If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by continuous
illumination of the amber (yellow) LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured at M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition, the
user can select the functions that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by
setting an m out of n parameter.
3-54
"Blocked/Faulty" signal
3-85
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.11
Tripping signals for
autotransformers
Starting signals
Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
As of version P63x -603 the following new tripping signals are available for applications
with autotransformers:
MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2
036 174
036 175
036 176
The trip signals of differential protection and ground differential protection plus the
general starting signals of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection
functions are combined into one common general starting signal.
DTOC1: General
starting
[ 035 128 ]
DTOC2: General
starting
[ 035 234 ]
DTOC3: General
starting
[ 035 244 ]
IDMT1: General
starting
[ 038 115 ]
IDMT2: General
starting
[ 038 135 ]
IDMT3: General
starting
[ 038 155 ]
DIFF: Starting
[ 041 106 ]
REF_1: Trip
signal
[ 041 005 ]
REF_2: Trip
signal
[ 041 016 ]
REF_3: Trip
signal
[ 041 067 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
64Z6002 A_EN
3-55
3-86
General starting of the P63x
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of starting signals
3-56
The general starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Counter for general starting signals.
Trip command
Manual trip command
Latching of the trip

commands
Blocking of the trip

commands
The P63x has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected by
setting a m out of n parameter independently for each of the four trip commands.
The minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long
as the conditions for the signal are met.
A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate
setting whether it will operate in latching mode. The trip command, set to latch mode,
will remain active until reset by parameters or reset through an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately configured binary
signal input. This blocking is then effective for all four trip commands. The trip signals
are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is indicated by
the continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured to "Blocked/Faulty". (To identify H2, see the
dimensional drawings in the Chapter entitled Design.)
3-87
3 Operation
(continued)
3-57
3-88
Forming the trip commands
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of trip commands
3-58
The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either individually
or as a group.
Counter of trip commands
3-89
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.12
Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date and time need
to be set in the P63x.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The P63x evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-59
3-90
Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input
3 Operation
(continued)
Priority control of time

synchronization
The protection device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock:
o
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full time)
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
Impulse every minute via a binary signal input (MAIN), see Figure 3-59 and previous
section.
Up to device version P63x -605 these interfaces were of equal priority, i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out irrespective of the source. No conflicts have to be taken
into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master, IRIG-B and
minute impulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the synchronization
sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock
may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so
as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while the SCADA
communication is out of service.
As of device version P63x -606 a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set at
M A I N : T i m e s yn c . t i m e - o u t .
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.
3-91
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.13
Resetting Mechanisms
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following mechanisms are available:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control
panel LCD by pressing the "Clear" key C located on the local control panel.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs
General reset
In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control panel LCD are
cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-60
3-92
General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.14
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications

Channels
There are two communication channels available. These physical communications

channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the
settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit
data to and from the P63x if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC
interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-61
Assigning communications interfaces to physical communications channels
3-93
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.15
Test mode
If tests are run on the P63x, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be marked accordingly.
3-62
3-94
Setting the test mode
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)

With the P63x, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.
Selecting the parameter
subset
Selecting the parameter

subset via binary inputs
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary
signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or via
the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the parameter
subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals.
The parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning
the logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P63x
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function setting will be active. The P63x also checks whether the signals present at the
binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true
when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of "1". If more than one signal
input is set to a logic level of "1", then the parameter subset previously selected remains
active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is
the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of "0"), then the stored hold time is
started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset
remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of "1", the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no
signal input with a logic level of "1", the parameter subset selected via the function
parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of "1" is present at any of the binary
signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter subset
selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has elapsed.
The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer stage is
running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When subset
selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately
100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-95
3 Operation
(continued)
3-63
3-96
Activating the parameter subsets

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P63x ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.
Tests during start-up
Cyclic tests
After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P63x. If the P63x detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P63x can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory the monitoring signal memory along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Signals
3-64
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured to
S F M O N : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is
detected.
Monitoring signals
3-97
3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
3-98
The response of the P63x depends on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure.
A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm
restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial
interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked
but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is
corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state.
This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart.
In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that
the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the
cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring
signal memory.
3 Operation
(continued)

(as of version P63x -605)
Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 ,Troubleshooting.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart. Previously this occurred
independently of the time duration that had passed since the first monitoring signal was
issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the
monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. A
"memory retention time" timer stage has been introduced to defuse this problem.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention
Now device blocking only occurs, when the same internal device fault is detected twice
during this time duration. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a
warm restart. In the default setting this timer stage is blocked so that, when an internal
fault is detected, the device will operate in the same way as the previous versions.

time tag
(as of version P63x -605)
Because of these changes the significance of the time tag for entries to the monitoring
signal memory has been re-defined. The time when the device fault occurred first was
previously recorded. As of version P63x 605 the time when the device fault occurred
last is now recorded.
3-99
3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events,
a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals,
each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in
chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as
function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end
of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, ground faults or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory
can be cleared/reset.
Counter for signals
relevant to system
operation
3-65
3-100
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If
more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the
SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals
prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the
monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an 'm
out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to
flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the
monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual
entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local
control panel.
Monitoring signal counter
3-66
The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s ).
Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
3-101
3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)

In the event of an overload, the P63x determines the following measured overload data.
3-102
Overload duration
Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the thermal
overload protection functions THRM1 and THRM2. The following values are
determined for each of the two functions:
Status of the thermal replica
Load current
Object temperature
Coolant temperature
Time remaining before tripping
Offset of the thermal replica
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the overload

duration
3-67
The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
Overload duration
3-103
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the
measured overload data
from the thermal overload
protection
3-68
3-104
Measured overload values are derived from the measured operating data of the thermal
overload protection function. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
Measured overload data from thermal overload protection (THRM1 shown)
3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)

Start of overload recording
The following description refers to the thermal overload protection 1 (THRM1) function
and can be applied similarly to THRM2.
An overload exists and consequently overload recording begins if at least the
T H R M 1 : Sta r ti n g k * Ir e f> signal is issued.
Counting overload events
3-69
Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
Counting overload events
3-105
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
Overload logging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise
time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event
when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the overload) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the
overload memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then O L _ R C : O v e r l .
m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
3-106
3 Operation
(continued)
3-70
Overload memory
3-107
3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)

When there is a fault in the power system, the P63x collects the following measured fault
data:
Running time and fault

duration
3-71
3-108
Running time
Fault duration
Fault currents
Differential current of all three measuring systems
Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current
Restraining current of all three measuring systems
Differential currents of ground differential protection
Restraining currents of ground differential protection
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal that is generated within the P63x, and the fault duration is defined as the time
between the start and end of the F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
Running time and fault duration
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time
The P63x determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault.
Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the
determination of the recording start time is selected by the P63x. If, for example, the
differential protection function detects a fault then the P63x determines the measured
fault data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was
measured. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several
protection functions detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the
priorities given in the table below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P63x.
Priority
Function Recognizing the Fault
Acquisition Time Criterion
Differential protection function
Maximum differential current
Ground differential protection, end a

(REF_1)
Ground differential protection, end b

(REF_2)
Ground differential protection, end c

(REF_3)
Definite-time overcurrent protection

or
inverse-time overcurrent protection
Maximum restraining current
Functions according to the selection

through m out of n parameters
End of fault
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end a)

(Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end b)
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end c)
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is
determined by the P63x and displayed.
3-109
3 Operation
(continued)
3-72
3-110
Determination of the fault data acquisition time
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the fault

currents
The P63x stores the fault currents data determined at the acquisition time. The following
fault currents are stored:
The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer
The residual current calculated from the phase currents
The current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
The fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom.
3-111
3 Operation
(continued)
3-73
3-112
Acquisition of the fault currents
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the
differential and restraining
currents
The P63x stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the
acquisition time by the differential protection and ground differential protection functions.
Moreover, the values for the second and fifth harmonics of the differential current are
stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.
3-113
3 Operation
(continued)
3-74
3-114
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
3 Operation
(continued)
3-75
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of ground differential protection
Fault data reset
After pressing the reset key C on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3-115
3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)

Start of fault recording
Fault counting
3-116
A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the signals selected
through an m out of n parameter is present. Moreover, fault recording is started if the
Id> and IR> triggers operate. In addition fault recording may also be started manually
using setting parameters or externally through an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3 Operation
(continued)
3-76
Start of fault recording and fault counter
3-117
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
Fault recordings
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault
when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or
through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the
onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory
or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault times,
are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of eight
faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the nonvolatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault recording
will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than
199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then
F T _ R C : F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and
date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C : F a u l t y t i m e t a g is
generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
3-118
3 Operation
(continued)
3-77
Fault memory
3-119
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data recording
The following analog signals are recorded:
The phase currents of all four ends of the transformer
The residual current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
Voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of
16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be
divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be
set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording
time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are
overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the
last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
3-120
3 Operation
(continued)
3-78 Fault value recording
3-121
3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF)

The P63x is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the protection of
motors and generators and of other two-winding end (P631, P632, P633, P634), threewinding (P633, P634) or four-winding end (P634) arrangements.
For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude matching is
required. This is achieved simply by setting the reference power - generally the nominal
power of the transformer - and of the primary nominal voltages for all winding ends of the
transformer.
Vector group matching is achieved by the straightforward input of the relevant vector
group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence current filtering
may be disabled. For conditions where it is possible to load the transformer with a
voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing restraint prevents unwanted
tripping.
For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, harmonic
restraint (inrush compensation) can be disabled. The start-up of directly switched
asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential protection due to transient
transformer saturation caused by a displacement of the start-up current for relatively high
primary time constants. Even under these unfavorable measurement conditions, the
P63x exhibits an excellent stable performance due to the application of a saturation
discriminator.
All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current
transformers are connected to the P63x in standard configuration (see section
'Conditioning of the measured values'). In particular, the application as transformer
differential protection presupposes that end 'a' corresponds to the high voltage side of
the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings must be taken
selected (see Chapter 7).
3-122
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling
differential protection
Differential protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Moreover,

enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-79 Enabling or disabling differential protection
3-123
3 Operation
(continued)
Amplitude matching
In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power identical for all windings - needs to be defined. For two-end arrangements, the nominal
power will usually be the transformers reference power. For three- or four-end
transformers, the nominal power of the winding with the highest-power should be set as
the reference power. The individual reference currents for each end of the protected
object are then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the
set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
I ref ,a =
I ref ,c =
Sref
I ref ,b =
3 Vnom ,a
Sref
I ref ,d =
3 Vnom ,c
Sref
3 Vnom ,b
Sref
3 Vnom ,d
reference power
reference current of end a, b, c or d
nominal voltage of end a, b, c or d
Sref:
:
Iref,a to d
Vnom,a to d:
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the
set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
k am ,a =
I nom ,a
k am ,c =
I nom ,c
I ref ,a
I ref ,c
k am ,b =
I nom ,b
k am ,d =
I nom ,d
I ref ,b
I ref ,d
with
kam,a to d:
Inom,a to d:
amplitude matching factor of end a, b, c or d

primary nominal currents of the system transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P63x.

The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their
permissible ranges. The acceptable ranges for the reference currents are found in the
Address List in the Appendix. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions:
3-124
The matching factors must always be 16.
The value for the second highest matching factor (kam,mid) must always be 0.5.
3 Operation
(continued)
In three- or four-end protection, the weakest end, that is the end with the smallest
primary nominal transformer current, is thus not under any restrictions pertaining to the
settings for the amplitude matching.
Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the
above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will be blocked
automatically.
The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are
multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing.
Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the
relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the
nominal currents of the device.
3-125
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Vnom
prim., end a
[ 019 017 ]
MAIN: Vnom
prim., end b
[ 019 018 ]
MAIN: Vnom
prim., end c
[ 019 019 ]
DIFF: Ref. curr.

Iref,a
[ 019 023 ]
DIFF: Ref. curr.
Iref,b
[ 019 024 ]
DIFF: Ref. curr.
Iref,c
[ 019 025 ]
DIFF: Ref. curr.
Iref,d
[ 019 038 ]
MAIN: Vnom
prim., end d
[ 019 037 ]
DIFF: Reference
power Sref
[ 019 016 ]
Iref ,a =Sref /( Vnom , a* 3)
Monit. range limits
SFMON: Iref, a
inval. range
[ 091 007 ]
Iref , b= Sref /( Vnom ,b* 3 )
Monit. range limits
SFMON: Iref, b
inval. range
[ 091 008 ]
Iref , c= Sref /( Vnom ,c* 3 )
Monit. range limits
SFMON: Iref, c
inval. range
[ 091 009 ]
Iref , d= Sref /( Vnom ,d* 3 )
Monit. range limits
SFMON: Iref, d
inval. range
[ 091 016 ]
DIFF:
fact.
[ 004
DIFF:
fact.
[ 004
DIFF:
fact.
[ 004
DIFF:
fact.
[ 004
MAIN: Inom
C.T.prim.,end a
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN: Inom
C.T.prim.,end b
[ 019 021 ]
Matching
kam,a
105 ]
Matching
kam,b
106 ]
Matching
kam,c
127 ]
Matching
kam,d
168 ]
MAIN: Inom
C.T.prim.,end c
[ 019 022 ]
kam,a > 16
SFMON: Matching
fail. end a
[ 091 000 ]
MAIN: Inom
C.T.prim.,end d
[ 019 026 ]
kam,b > 16
SFMON: Matching
fail. end b
[ 091 001 ]
kam,c > 16
SFMON: Matching
fail. end C
[ 091 002 ]
kam,d > 16
kam,a=Inom,a/Iref,a
SFMON: Matching
fail. end D
[ 091 017 ]
kam,b=Inom,b/Iref,b
kam,c=Inom,c/Iref,c
kam,d=Inom,d/Iref,d
kam,pos
kam,pos < 0.5
SFMON: 2nd
match.fact. inv.
[ 091 006 ]
DIFF: Sound match
303 310
64Z6013 A_EN
3-80 Calculating and checking the matching factors.
3-126
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
DIFF: Sound match

303 310
DIFF: Matching
fact. kam,a
[ 004 105]
kam,a*IA,a
Iam,A,a
kam,a*IB,a
Iam,B,a
kam,a*IC,a
Iam,C,a
kam,b*IA,b
Iam,A,b
kam,b*IB,b
Iam,B,b
kam,b*IC,b
Iam,C,b
kam,c*IA,c
Iam,A,c
kam,c*IB,c
Iam,B,c
kam,c*IC,c
Iam,C,c
kam,d*IA,d
Iam,A,d
kam,d*IB,d
Iam,B,d
kam,d*IC,d
Iam,C,d
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
DIFF: Matching
fact. kam,b
[ 004 106]
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
DIFF: Matching
fact. kam,c
[ 004 127]
IA,c
IB,c
IC,c
DIFF: Matching
fact. kam,d
[ 004 168]
IA,d
IB,d
IC,d
64Z5004 B_EN
3-81 Amplitude matching
3-127
3 Operation
(continued)
Vector group matching
Vector group matching indicates that the low voltage-side currents are rotated with
respect to the high voltage-side currents according to the vector group of the transformer
to be protected. Thereby, phase coincidence with the high voltage-side currents is
restored. With the P63x, this is achieved by calculating the relevant vector difference or
where appropriate, by sign inversion for the low voltage-side phase currents (end b, c
or d). Care must be taken to avoid distortion of the amplitude matching by this
operation. For all odd vector groups, this is achieved by means of the factor 1/ 3 .
Using vector diagrams, it can be shown that the operations listed in the following table
will lead to phase coincidence of the high and low voltage-side currents while
maintaining the amplitude matching. In Figure 3-82, such a vector diagram is depicted
for a transformer having the vector group Yd5 as an example. By subtraction of each
phase current from the cyclically leading phase current and subsequent multiplication by
the factor 1/ 3 , the desired matching is achieved.
3-128
3 Operation
(continued)
3-82 Vector diagram for vector group matching with a transformer having the vector group Yd5
3-129
3 Operation
(continued)
Zero-sequence current
filtering
The table shows that the zero-sequence current is subtracted from the phase currents of
end a and, for all even vector groups, from the phase currents of ends b, c and d.
According to the theory of symmetrical components, the zero-sequence current is
calculated by dividing by 3 the vector sum of the phase currents:
I am ,0,z =
1
I am ,A ,z + I am ,B ,z + I am ,C ,z
3
z:
Iam:
end a, b, c or d
amplitude-matched current
Zero-sequence filtering may be disabled separately for each end.

In general this disabling of zero-sequence filtering is intended for even-numbered vector
groups. Should the side considered here require the setting of an odd-numbered vector
group while at the same time no operational system star point grounding is provided
within the protected area, then, in view of increased sensitivity with single-pole internal
faults, it is recommended that the respective zero-sequence current is fed to the
individual measuring systems again.
Zero-sequence filtering for end z is enabled using setting parameter:
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.z en.PSx.
The following table lists the required operations for all vector groups that may occur.
The indices in the equations have the following meanings:
am:
s:
x:
y:
z:
x+1:
x-1:
3-130
amplitude-matched
amplitude- and vector group-matched
phase A, B or C
measuring system 1, 2 or 3
end b, c or d
cyclically trailing phase
cyclically leading phase
3 Operation
(continued)
End
ID of the
vector group
a
0 = 12
1
b, c or d
Setting:
With zero-sequence filtering
Is,y ,z =
Setting:
Without zero-sequence filtering
Is,y ,z =
I am ,x,a I am ,0,a
I am ,x,a
I am ,x,z I am ,0,z
I am ,x,z
[I am ,x,z I am,x +1,z ]
I am ,0,z I am ,x ,+1,z
[I
amp ,x 1,z
I am ,x 1,z I am ,0,z
[I am,x 1,z I am,x ,z ]
I am ,0,z I am ,x ,z
[I am,x +1,z I am,x,z ]
amp ,x 1,z
I am ,x +1,z
+ I am ,0,z
1
3
+ I am ,0,z
I am ,x ,z
[I am,x +1,z I am,x,z ]
1
3
[I am,x +1,z I am,x 1,z ]

[I am,x ,z I am,x 1,z ]
[I
[I am,x 1,z I am,x ,z ]
11
I am ,x +1,z I am ,0,z
I am ,0,z I am ,x 1,z
+ I am ,0,z
I am ,x 1,z
10
I am ,x +1,z
I am ,x +1,z
[I am ,x,z I am,x +1,z ]
1
3
+ I am ,0,z
I am ,x +1,z
1
3
[I am,x +1,z I am,x 1,z ]
1
3
+ I am ,0,z
I am ,x -1,z
1
3
[I am,x ,z I am,x 1,z ]
1
3
+ I am ,0,z
Vector group matching is via a straight-forward input of the vector group identification
number provided that the phase currents of the high and low voltage side(s) are
connected in standard configuration (see section 'Conditioning of the measured values').
For other configurations, special considerations apply (see Chapter 7). A reverse phase
rotation (A-C-B) needs to be taken into account by making the appropriate setting at the
P63x. The P63x will then automatically form the complementary value of the set vector
group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 set ID).
3-131
3 Operation
(continued)
Is,1,a
Is,y,a
Is,2,a
Is,3,a
DIFF: 0-seq.
filt.a en.PSx
Parameter
set
set
set
set
0: no
1: yes
DIFF: 0-seq.
filt.b en.PSx
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends

a-b PSx
[
*
]
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIFF: 0-seq.
filt.a en.PSx
072 155
073 155
074 155
075 155
DIFF: 0-seq.
filt.b en.PSx
072 156
073 156
074 156
075 156
DIFF: Vec.gr.
ends a-b PSx
019 010
019 040
019 041
019 042
0: no
1: yes
Iam,A,a
Iam,B,a
Iam,0,a
Iam,C,a
Iam,A,b
Iam,B,b
Iam,0,b
Iam,C,b
Iam,A,c
Iam,B,c
Iam,0,c
Iam,C,c
Is,1,b
Is,y,b
Is,2,b
Is,3,b
Iam,A,d
DIFF: 0-seq.
filt.c en.PSx
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends

a-c PSx
[
*
]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
Iam,B,d
1
2
3
4
DIFF: 0-seq.
filt.c en.PSx
072 157
073 157
074 157
075 157
DIFF: Vec.gr.
ends a-c PSx
019 011
019 043
019 044
019 045
0: no
Iam,C,d
1: yes
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
Is,1,c
Is,y,c
Is,2,c
Is,3,c
64Z6010 A_EN
3-83 Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c
3-132
3 Operation
(continued)
Parameter
set
set
set
set
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.d

en.PSx
1
2
3
4
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.d

en.PSx
072 154
073 154
074 154
075 154
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends

a-d PSx
019 014
019 046
019 047
019 048
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends

a-d PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
Iam,A,d
Iam,B,d
Iam,0,d
Iam,C,d
Is,1,d
Is,y,d
Is,2,d
Is,3,d
64Z6011 A_EN
3-84 Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d
3-133
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The differential and restraining current values for each measurement system are
calculated from the current values after amplitude and vector group matching.
The formation of the restraining values differs between two- and three-winding protection
The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to the
protected equipment, e.g. all the current arrows of all windings point either towards the
protected object or away from it.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
I d ,y = I s ,y ,a + I s ,y ,b
I R ,y = 0.5 I s ,y ,a I s ,y ,b
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three-winding or four-winding

protection:
Id ,y = I s ,y ,a + I s ,y ,b + I s ,y ,c + I s ,y ,d
IR ,y = 0.5 I s ,y ,a + I s ,y ,b + I s ,y ,c + I s ,y ,d
The tripping characteristic of the P63x line differential protection device has two knee
points. The first knee-point depends on the setting at D I F F : I d i f f > P S x and is on
the intersection with the tripping characteristic for single-side feed.
If the new current transformer supervision (CTS) function - as of version P63x -606 - is
used, the basic pick-up sensitivity D IF F : Id i ff> can be increased to a set value
(D IF F : Id i ff> ( C T S) ) when a CT fault is detected. See details given in the section
describing the CTS function group.
The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting at
DIFF: IR,m2 PSx.
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 3-85
shows the tripping characteristic.
Characteristics equation for the range 0 IR 0.5 I diff > :
Id
I >
= diff
I ref
Iref
Characteristics equation for the range 0.5 Idiff >< IR IR ,m 2 :

I >
Id
I
= m1 R + dif (1 0.5 m1 )
I ref
I ref
I ref
3-134
3 Operation
(continued)
Characteristics equation for the range I R ,m 2 < I R :

I
I >
Id
I
= m2 H + diff (1 0.5 m1 ) + R ,m 2 (m1 m2 )
Iref
I ref
Iref
I ref
Iref:
m1:
reference current
gradient of the characteristic in range 0.5 Idiff >< IR IH ,m 2
m2:
gradient of characteristic in range I R ,m 2 < I H
8.00
Id / Iref
Tripping area
2.00
m2
7
0.
Blocking area
0.3
m1 =
IR,m2 / Iref = 4.0
Id> / Iref = 0.2

0.00
I
3-85
12200e.DS4
4.00
Fau
for lt cur
sin ren
gle
t
-sid char
e f acte
eed
rist
ic
6.00
2.00
4.00
II
6.00
IR / Iref
8.00
III
Tripping characteristic of differential protection
3-135
3 Operation
(continued)
If the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the basic pick-up sensitivity
D IF F : Id i ff> can be increased to a value set at D IF F : Id i ff> ( C T S) .
Idiff
Fault current characteristic

for single-side infeed
m2
Idiff>(CTS)
1
m1
Idiff>
0
IR,m2
IR
64Z6030A_EN
3-86
Rapid (high-set) differential

protection
3-136
Changing the characteristic if C T S : I d i f f > ( C T S ) a c t i v e = Yes
Above the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > P S x of the differential current, the
P63x will trip without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the overfluxing
stabilization. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold
D I F F : I d i f f > > > P S x , the restraining current and the saturation discriminator are no
longer taken into account either, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining
value and the saturation discriminator.
3 Operation
(continued)
3-87 Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems
3-137
3 Operation
(continued)
DIFF: Sat.discr.
1 trigg.
[ 041 115 ]
DIFF: Sat.discr.
2 trigg.
[ 041 116 ]
DIFF: Sat.discr.
3 trigg.
[ 041 117 ]
DIFF: Op.mode
rush rst.PSx
[
*
]
DIFF: Harm.block
1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: Harm.block
2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF: Harm.block
3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
0: Without
1: Not phase-selective
2: Phase-selective
DIFF: Idiff>(#)
PSx
[
*
]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.1
trigg.
[ 041 121 ]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.2
trigg.
[ 041 122 ]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.3
trigg.
[ 041 123 ]
DIFF: Enabled
[ 041 210 ]
DIFF: m1
PSx
[
*
DIFF: m2
PSx
[
*
DIFF: IR,m2
PSx
[
*
DIFF: Op.del.,
trip sig.PSx
[
*
]
DIFF: Trip signal

[ 041 075 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
DIFF: Trip
signal 1
[ 041 002 ]
DIFF: Id,1
303 303
DIFF: IR,1
DIFF: Trip
signal 2
[ 041 003 ]
303 305
DIFF: Id,2
DIFF: Trip
signal 3
[ 041 004 ]
303 304
DIFF: IR,2
303 306
DIFF: Id,3
303 307
DIFF: Idiff>>
PSx
[
*
]
DIFF: IR,3
303 308
DIFF: Id>>
triggered
[ 041 221 ]
DIFF: Idiff>>>
PSx
[
*
]
#
or
DIFF: Idiff>(CTS)PSx
if
CTS: Idiff>(CTS)active
=yes
[ 036 203 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIFF: Meas.system
1 trigg.
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF: Meas.system
2 trigg.
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF: Meas.system
3 trigg.
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF: Op.mode
rush rst.PSx
072 148
073 148
074 148
075 148
DIFF: Idiff>
PSx
072 142
073 142
074 142
075 142
DIFF: Idiff>(CTS)
PSx
080 000
081 000
082 000
083 000
DIFF: m1
PSx
072 145
073 145
074 145
075 145
DIFF: m2
PSx
072 146
073 146
074 146
075 146
DIFF: IR,m2
PSx
072 147
073 147
074 147
075 147
DIFF: Id>>>
triggered
[ 041 222 ]
DIFF: Idiff>>
PSx
072 143
073 143
074 143
075 143
DIFF: Idiff>>>
PSx
072 144
073 144
074 144
075 144
DIFF: Op.del.,
trip sig.PSx
010 162
010 163
010 164
010 165
64Z6012 A_EN
3-88 Measuring system of the P63x
3-138
3 Operation
(continued)
Inrush stabilization
(harmonic restraint)
When an unloaded transformer is connected, the inrush current at unfavorable switching

instants such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the transformer nominal
current several times over. It takes some time for the current to assume its small
stationary value. Since the high inrush current flows on the connected side only, the
tripping characteristic of the differential protectionP63x may give rise to a trip unless
stabilizing action is taken. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of
harmonics having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against
tripping by the inrush current.
The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second
harmonic components I(2*f0) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio
I(2*f0) / I(f0) exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring system,
tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes:
across all three measuring systems
selectively for one measuring system (see Figure 3-88).
There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-139
3 Operation
(continued)
DIFF: Trip signal

[ 041 075 ]
DIFF: Meas.system 1
trigg.
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF: Meas.system 2
trigg.
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF: Meas.system 3
trigg.
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF: Rush
I(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
[
*
]
DIFF: Id,1
f0
f0
f0
&
30ms
&
30ms
&
I(2*f0)/ I(f0)
&
I(f0)
2*f0 I(2*f0)
DIFF: Id,3
30ms
&
I(f0)
2*f0 I(2*f0)
DIFF: Id,2
I(2*f0)/ I(f0)
DIFF: Harm.block
1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: Harm.block
2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF: Harm.block
3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
&
I(f0)
2*f0 I(2*f0)
I(2*f0)/ I(f0)
DIFF: I(2*f0),1
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIFF: Rush
I(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
072 159
073 159
074 159
075 159
303 301
DIFF: I(2*f0),2
303 302
DIFF: I(2*f0),3
303 309
Q6Z0110 C_EN
3-89 Inrush stabilization (Harmonic restraint)
3-140
3 Operation
(continued)
Saturation discriminator
Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the
bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is particularly
pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard for through-currents
with transformer saturation, the P63x is provided with a saturation discriminator.
After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator monitors
the occurrence of the differential current over time. For internal faults, the differential
current appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining current. In the case of
passing currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not
appear until transformer saturation begins. Accordingly, a locking signal is generated on
the basis of level monitoring of the differential current as compared to the restraining
current, and thus the desired through-stabilization is achieved. Locking is restricted to
the measuring system where an external fault was detected.
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-90 Saturation discriminator
3-141
3 Operation
(continued)
Overfluxing stabilization
If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation
effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping.
The fact that the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high
proportion of harmonics having five times the system frequency serves as the basis of
stabilization.
The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second
harmonic components I(5*f0) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio
I(5*f0) / I(f0) exceeds the set value D I F F : O v e r I ( 5 f 0 ) / I ( f 0 ) P S x in at least one
measuring system, and if the restraining current is smaller than 4Iref, then tripping is
blocked selectively for one measuring system.
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-142
3 Operation
(continued)
3-91 Overfluxing stabilization
3-143
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured operating data

of differential protection
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data
provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-92 Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
3-144
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 to REF_3)

The ground differential protection function (Br.: restricted earth fault protection) can be
applied to transformer windings with grounded neutral point where the neutral point-toground connection is fitted with a current transformer.
The ground differential protection (Br: restricted earth fault protection) function is not
provided by the P631. For the other P63x models, one ground differential protection
function per transformer winding is available for up to three ends. The P63x display
shows the winding end associated with a particular ground differential protection
function. Connection for and operation of the ground differential protection function will
now be presented with end 'a' as an example. Equivalent considerations apply to ends
'b' and 'c'.
Ground differential protection may be applied to transformer ends with a grounded
neutral-point, but in this case the neutral-point-to-ground connection must be fitted with
a CT.
Ground differential protection is based on comparing the vector sum IN of the phase
currents of the relevant transformer end to the neutral-point current IY. The P63x
calculates the vector sum of the phase currents. For the connection, see section
'Conditioning of the measured values'.
3-145
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling or enabling
ground differential
protection
3-93
3-146
Ground differential protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
Disabling or enabling ground differential protection
3 Operation
(continued)
Amplitude matching
For amplitude matching, the nominal power of the transformer end should first be set as
the reference power. The reference current is then calculated by the P63x on the basis
of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltage of the transformer end.
I ref,N ,a =
Sref
3 Vnom ,a
reference power
Sref:
Iref,N,a: reference current of the ground differential protection function, end a
Vnom,a: nominal voltage, end a
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the
set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
k am ,N ,a =
I nom ,a
I ref,N ,a
k am ,Y ,a =
I nom ,Y ,a
I ref,N,a
with
am:
amplitude-matched
Inom,a: primary nominal current of the main current transformer
Inom,Y,a: primary nominal current of current transformer in the neutral-point-to-ground
connection
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P63x.
The P63x checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their
permissible ranges. The acceptable range for the reference current can be read out
from the S&R 103 operating program. The following applies to the matching factors:
The matching factor must always be 16.
The value for the smaller matching factor (kam,min) must always be 0.5.
Should the P63x calculate a reference current or matching factors not meeting the above
conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically.
The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then
available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured
values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer
nominal current or the nominal current of the device.
3-147
3 Operation
(continued)
REF_1: Reference
power Sref
[ 019 031 ]
MAIN: Vnom
prim., end a
[ 019 017 ]
Iref,N,a=Sref/
(Vnom*3)
REF_1: Ref. curr.

Iref
[ 019 034 ]
SFMON: Inv.range
Iref REF_1
[ 091 105 ]
Monit. range limits
MAIN: Inom
C.T.prim.,end a
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN: Inom
C.T.Yprim,end a
[ 019 027 ]
kam,N,a =
Inom,a/
Iref,N,a
REF_1: Matching
fact. kam,N
[ 004 160 ]
kam,N,a =
Inom,Y,a/
Iref,N,a
REF_1: Matching
fact.kam,Y
[ 004 163 ]
kam,N,a > 16
SFMON: Match.f.
kam,N REF_1
[ 091 101 ]
kam,N,a > 16
SFMON: Match.f.
kam,Y REF_1
[ 091 102 ]
kam,min
kam,min < 0.5
SFMON: Min.mtch.
f.inv.REF_1
[ 091 104 ]
64Z6020 A_EN
3-94
3-148
Calculating and monitoring the matching factors
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes
As of version P63x -603 a new parameter makes it possible for the user to choose
among three operating modes.
PS1
Address
PS2
PS3
Description
Range of Values
PS4
072 149
073 149
074 149
075 149 E D I F 1 : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x
Low imped. / sum(IP)

Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
072 169
073 169
074 169

Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
072 049
073 049
074 049

Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
The 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode is the same as the (low impedance) ground
differential protection function previously provided by version P63x -602.
3-149
3 Operation
(continued)
'Low imped. / sum(IP)'

operating mode
From the amplitude-matched resultant currents Iam,N,a and Iam,Y,a , the differential and
restraining currents are calculated as follows:
I d ,N ,a = I am ,N,a + I am ,Y,a
I R ,N,a = I am ,N,a
Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of uniformly
defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current arrows point either
towards the protected object or away from it.
Figure 3-95 shows the tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection
function. The characteristic equation is as follows:
I d ,N ,a
I ref
with
Idiff>,N,a:
3-150
Idiff > ,N,a

I ref ,N ,a
+ 1.005
IR ,N,a
I ref ,N ,a
setting at R E F _ 1 : I d i f f > P S x
3 Operation
(continued)
Id,N / Iref
cu
rre
nt
tra
ns
fo
rm
er
s
8.00
Tripping area
Id,N> / Iref = 0.2

0.00
3-95
2.00
Blocking area
12201e.DS4
2.00
Fa
ul
tc
ur
re
nt
ch
ar
ac
te
ris
tic
5
00
.
1
fo
rt
ra
ns
ie
nt
4.00
sa
tu
ra
tio
n
of
th
e
m
ai
n
6.00
4.00
6.00
IR,N / Iref
8.00
Tripping characteristic of ground differential protection with the 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode
3-151
3 Operation
(continued)
'Low imped. / IP,max'

operating mode
Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are defined as
follows:
Id = k am ,P {I A ,I B ,I C }+ k am ,Y I Y
IR =
1
(k am ,P max{I A , I B , I C }+ k am ,Y I Y
2
When compared to the 'Low imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode, a double slope tripping
characteristic can be used here because of the definition of the restraining current (see
Figure 3-96). In particular, this tripping characteristic permits a tripping test under load
current by shorting a phase current (to simulate residual current) without the need of star
point current IY.
Besides the Idiff> parameter, already available to set the basic pick-up sensitivity, the
following parameters are also provided with the 'Low imped. / IP,max' operating mode to
set the tripping characteristic; in this case IR,m2 is equivalent to Iref.
PS1
3-152
Address
PS2
PS3
Description
Range of Values
PS4
072 162
073 162
074 162
075 162 REF_1: m1
PSx
0.00 0.20 1.00
072 163
073 163
074 163
075 163 R E F _ 1 : m 2
PSx
0.15 1.50
072 164
073 164
074 164
075 164 R E F _ 1 : I R , m 2
PSx
0.10 1.00 1.50
072 172
073 172
074 172
075 172 REF_1: m1
PSx
0.00 0.20 1.00
072 165
073 165
074 165
075 165 R E F _ 1 : m 2
PSx
0.15 1.50
072 166
073 166
074 166
075 166 R E F _ 1 : I R , m 2
PSx
0.10 1.00 1.50
072 192
073 192
074 192
075 192 REF_1: m1
PSx
0.00 0.20 1.00
072 193
073 193
074 193
075 193 R E F _ 1 : m 2
PSx
0.15 1.50
072 194
073 194
074 194
075 194 R E F _ 1 : I R , m 2
PSx
0.10 1.00 1.50
3 Operation
(continued)
Id/Iref
Fault current characteristic for

single-end, single-phase
infeed
1.5
m
0.5
I diff>
IR,m2
0.5
1.5
IR/Iref
64Z6021A_EN
3-96
Tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection with the 'Low imped. / IP,max' operating mode
'High impedance'
operating mode
This operating mode is provided for application with the high impedance current
measuring approach. The pick-up sensitivity is set via the Idiff> parameter which is
already available.
3-153
3 Operation
(continued)
Idiff>>> threshold
Applying Current
Transformer Supervision
The restraining quantity is no longer taken into account when the differential current
value exceeds the threshold set at R E F _ 1 : I d i f f > > > P S x . Therefore the P63x will
issue a trip signal independently of the restraining quantity.
When applying current transformer supervision (CTS) (as of version P63x -606), the
ground differential protection function may be blocked for the relevant end where a CT
fault is detected. See details given in the section describing the CTS function group.
When a C T S : A l a r m e n d y signals is issued, the associated ground differential
protection function is then blocked, if if it has been set accordingly
(R E F _ n : C T S e f f e c t i v e P S x = 'Yes' by assigning REF_n to end y).
3-154
3 Operation
(continued)
REF_1: Idiff>
PSx
[
*
]
CTS: Alarm end a

[ 036 205 ]
1: yes
REF_1: CTS
effective
[ 080 003 ]
1: yes
REF_1: m1
PSx
[
*
REF_1: m2
PSx
[
*
REF_1: IR,m2
PSx
[
*
]
REF_1: Enabled
[ 041 132 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
IA, a
IN,a
IB, a
kam,N,a*IN,a
Id,N,a
kam,Y,a*IN,a
IR,Y,a
REF_1: Trip
signal
[ 041 005 ]
IC, a
IY, a
REF_1: Idif>>>
PSx
[
*
]
REF_1: IR,N,a
402 551
REF_1: Id,N,a
402 550
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-97
1
2
3
4
REF_1: Idiff>
PSx
072 150
073 150
074 150
075 150
REF_1: m1
PSx
072 162
073 162
074 162
075 162
DIFF: m2
PSx
072 163
073 163
074 163
075 163
REF_1: IR,m2
PSx
072 164
073 164
074 164
075 164
REF_1: Idiff>>>
PSx
072 151
073 151
074 151
075 151
64Z6022 A_EN
Measuring system of the P63x
3-155
3 Operation
(continued)

of ground differential
protection
3-98
3-156
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data
provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 to DTOC3)

In the P63x a three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC protection)
is available for up to three transformer ends. The measured values to be monitored by
the respective DTOC functions are selected using a setting parameter. With the P633
and P634, these values can also be quantities formed by summation of the current
values from two user-selected transformer ends. With the P631 and P632, the 'Current
summation' setting has no effect. Phase current values as well as negative-sequence
and residual current measured values are monitored. Function group DTOC1 will serve
as an example to illustrate the operation of the DTOC protection functions. The same
will apply to function groups DTOC2 and DTOC3.
3-99
Selection of measured values for DTOC protection

(Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of 'Current summation' applies to the P633 and P634 only)
3-157
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC protection
3-100
3-158
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,

enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages
The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active.
The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters"
(see section "Activation of dynamic parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active
when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase,
timer stages are started. Once the time delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush
stabilization function of differential protection.
3-159
3 Operation
(continued)
3-101
3-160
Phase current stages
3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current
stages
The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this equation. This is based on the setting at M AIN : Ph a s e s e q u e n c e .
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
Ineg = IA + a IB + a IC
3
Phase sequence A-C-B:

1
Ineg = IA + a IB + a 2 IC
3
a = e j120
a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to

detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be
active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic
parameters" (see section "Activation of dynamic parameters") and the "normal"
thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set
thresholds, timer stages are started. Once these time delays have elapsed, a trip signal
is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
The first stage of the negative-sequence current protection function can optionally be
blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
3-161
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC1: Gen.
starting modePSx
[
*
]
1: With start. IN/
Ineg
DTOC1: Block.
tIneg> EXT
[ 036 141 ]
DTOC1: Rush
restr.enabl PSx
[
*
]
1: yes
DIFF: Harm.block
1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: Harm.block
2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF: Harm.block
3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
DTOC1: Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
DTOC1: Ineg>
PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: Dynam.
param. active
[ 040 090]
DTOC1: Ineg>
dynamic PSx
[
*
]
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
DTOC1: tIneg>
PSx
[
*
]
IA,y
IB,y
DTOC1: Trip
signal tIneg>
[ 036 151 ]
DTOC1: tIneg>
elapsed
[ 036 148 ]
Ineg,y
IC,y
DTOC1: Block.
tIneg>> EXT
[ 036 142 ]
DTOC1: Starting
Ineg>
[ 036 145 ]
DTOC1: Ineg>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC1: Ineg>>
dynamic PSx
[
*
]
DTOC1: tIneg>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC1: Trip
signal tIneg>>
[ 036 152 ]
DTOC1: tIneg>>
elapsed
[ 036 149 ]
DTOC1: Block.
tIneg>>> EXT
[ 036 143 ]
DTOC1: Starting
Ineg>>
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC1: Ineg>>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC1: Ineg>>>
dynamic PSx
[
*
]
DTOC1: tIneg>>>
PSx
[
*
]
DTOC1: Trip
signal tIneg>>>
[ 036 153 ]
DTOC1: tIneg>>>
elapsed
[ 036 150]
DTOC1: Starting
Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
DTOC1: Starting
Ineg
[ 036 144 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DTOC1: Ineg>
PSx
076 197
077 197
078 197
079 197
DTOC1: Ineg>
dynamic PSx
076 200
077 200
078 200
079 200
DTOC1: Ineg>>
PSx
076 198
077 198
078 198
079 198
DTOC1: Ineg>>
dynamic
PSx
076 201
077 201
078 201
079 201
DTOC1: Rush
restr.enabl PSx
076 063
077 063
078 063
079 063
DTOC1: Ineg>>>
PSx
076 199
077 199
078 199
079 199
DTOC1: Ineg>>>
dynamic PSx
076 202
077 202
078 202
079 202
DTOC1: tIneg>
PSx
076 203
077 203
078 203
079 203
DTOC1: tIneg>>
PSx
076 204
077 204
078 204
079 204
DTOC1: tIneg>>>
PSx
076 205
077 205
078 205
079 205
DTOC1: Gen.
starting modePSx
076 066
077 066
078 066
079 066
64Z5074 C_EN
3-102
3-162
Negative-sequence current stages
3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stages
The residual current is monitored by the with three-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active.
The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters"
(see "Activation of Dynamic Parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active when
no hold time is running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages
are started. Once the time delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating
mode of the general starting decision is set to 'With starting IN', a trip signal is issued as
well.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multipole starting (depending on the setting).
3-163
3 Operation
(continued)
3-103
3-164
Residual current stages

3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
3-104
If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a general
starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in the general
starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A signal is issued when the
time delay of this stage has elapsed.
General starting
3-165
3 Operation
(continued)
Counters of the DTOC

protection function
3-105
3-166
The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Counters of the DTOC protection function
3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 to IDMT3)

The P63x features an inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT protection) for
up to three transformer ends. The measured variables to be monitored by the respective
IDMT function are selected by a setting parameter. With the P633 and P634 this can
also be quantities formed by summation of current values from two user-selected
transformer ends. With the P631 and P632 the 'Current summation' setting has no
effect. Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current
measured values are monitored. Function group IDMT1 will serve as an example to
illustrate the operation of the IDMT protection functions. The same will apply to function
groups IDMT2 and IDMT3.
3-106
Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection

3-167
3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT protection
3-107
Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
Time-dependent
characteristics
3-168
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Moreover, enabling
can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negativesequence current and the residual current operate independently and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics. The tripping
characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-108 Tripping characteristics
as per IEC 255-3 to 3-11 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping
characteristics.
3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping
.
Characteristic
Formula for the

Tripping
Characteristic
Constants
Characteristic settable
factor:
k = 0.05 to 10.00
Formula for the

Reset Characteristic
0.14
0.02
2 Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
3 Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
4 Long Time Inverse
120.00
1.00
0 Definite Time
Per IEC 255-3
t=k
t =k
a
I
I
ref
1 Standard Inverse
Per IEEE C37.112
+
t = k
c
I b
1
ref
5 Moderately Inverse
tr = k
R
I
I
ref
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
4.85
6 Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
21.60
7 Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
29.10
Per ANSI
+
t = k
c
I b
1
ref
tr = k
R
I
I
ref
8 Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938 0.17966
9.00
9 Short Time Inverse
0.2663
1.2969 0.03393
0.50
10 Long Time Inverse
5.6143
1.0000 2.18592
15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse
t =k
1
0.339
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
0.236
I
I
ref
I
t = k 5.8 1.35 ln
I
ref
3-169
3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3. Standard Inverse
IEC 255-3. Very Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
k=10
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
I/IB
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K1B
Characteristic No. 1
IEC 255-3. Long Time Inverse
IEC 255-3. Extremely Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
k=10
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
S8Z50K3B
3-170
k=1
t/s
I/Iref
I/Iref
3-108
k=10
10
10
t/s
0.01
S8Z50K2B
S8Z50K4B
Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112. Very Inverse
IEEE C37.112. Moderately Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
k=10
t/s
t/s
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
I/Iref
S8Z50K5C
S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112. Extremely Inverse

1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K7C
3-109
Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
3-171
3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI. Short Time Inverse
ANSI. Normally Inverse

1000
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
t/s
1
k=10
0.1
k=1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K8C
S8Z50K9C
ANSI. Long Time Inverse

1000
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=0.1
1
k=1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50KAC
3-110
3-172
Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
3 Operation
(continued)
RXIDG-Type Inverse
RI-Type Inverse
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
k=1
t/s
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
I/Iref
S8Z50KBB
3-111
k=10
10
10
S8Z50KCB
RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
3-173
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stage
The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x to detect when they exceed the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The dynamic
threshold is active for the set hold time of the dynamic parameters (see Activation of
Dynamic Parameters); the normal threshold is active when no hold time is running.
The IDMT protection function will be triggered when the 1.05-fold of the set reference
current value is exceeded in one phase. The P63x will then determine the maximum
current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for further processing.
Depending on the characteristic selected and the current magnitude, the P63x will
determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum tripping time can be set; the
tripping time will not fall below this minimum independently of the magnitude of the
current.
The IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization
function of differential protection.
3-174
3 Operation
(continued)
3-112
Phase current stage
3-175
3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence
current stage
The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this formula. This is based on the setting at M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e .
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
2
Ineg = I A + a IB + a IC
3
Phase sequence A-C-B:

1
2
Ineg = I A + a IB + a IC
3
a = e j120
a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the
set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic"
thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see "Activation
of Dynamic Parameters") and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set reference current
value is exceeded. Dependent on the characteristic selected and the negative-sequence
current magnitude the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum
tripping time can be set; the tripping time will not fall below this minimum independent of
the magnitude of the current.
The negative-sequence current stage of the IDMT protection function can be blocked
optionally by the inrush stabilization function of the differential protection.
3-176
3 Operation
(continued)
DIFF: Harm.block 1
trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
IDMT1: Rush
restr.enabl
[
*
]
DIFF: Harm.block 2
trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
PSx
DIFF: Harm.block 3
trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
1: yes
0: no
IDMT1: Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
IDMT1: Iref,neg
PSx
[
*
]
306 001
MAIN: Dynam.
param. active
[ 040 090 ]
IDMT1: Iref,neg
dynamic PSx
[
*
]
1.05 * Iref
IDMT1: Starting
Iref,neg>
[ 038 173 ]
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
Ineg
IDMT1: Release neg
PSx
Setting
Setting
IDMT1: Factor
kt,neg
PSx
[
*
]
1: IEC Standart Inverse
IDMT1: Min. trip t.

neg PSx
[
*
]
IDMT1: Hold time
neg
PSx
[
*
]
1: Without delay
2: Delayed as per char.
IDMT1: Block.
tIref,neg> EXT
[ 038 178 ]
IDMT1: Character.
neg. PSx
[
*
]
IDMT1: Release neg

PSx
[
*
]
IDMT1: Character. neg.
PSx
2: IEC Very Inverse

3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long
Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse

12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
IDMT1: tIref,neg>
elapsed
[ 038 174 ]
IDMT1: Hold time
neg runn.
[ 038 175 ]
Ineg/Iref,neg
IDMT1: Memory
'neg' clear
[ 038 176 ]
IDMT1: Gen.
starting modePSx
[
*
]
IDMT1: Trip sig.

tIref,neg>
[ 038 177 ]
1: With start. IN/

Ineg
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
3-113
1
2
3
4
IDMT1: Rush
restr.enabl
081 060
082 060
083 060
084 060
IDMT1: Factor
kt,neg
PSx
081 114
082 114
083 114
084 114
PSx
IDMT1: Iref,neg
PSx
081 111
082 111
083 111
084 111
IDMT1: Iref,neg
dynamic PSx
081 112
082 112
083 112
084 112
IDMT1: Character.
neg. PSx
081 113
082 113
083 113
084 113
IDMT1: Min. trip

t. neg PSx
081 117
082 117
083 117
084 117
IDMT1: Hold time

neg
PSx
081 115
082 115
083 115
084 115
IDMT1: Release
neg
PSx
081 116
082 116
083 116
084 116
IDMT1: Gen.
starting modePSx
081 059
082 059
083 059
084 059
64Z5076C_EN
Negative-sequence
current stage
3-177
3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stage
The residual current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic"
threshold is active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see section
"Activation of dynamic parameters") and the "normal" threshold is active when no hold
time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set reference
current value is exceeded by the residual current. Dependent on the characteristic
selected and the residual current magnitude the P63x will determine the tripping time.
Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum
time threshold irrespective of the residual current flow magnitude.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal
input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked by singlepole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
3-178
3 Operation
(continued)
3-114
Residual current stage
3-179
3 Operation
(continued)
Hold time
3-180
The setting of the hold time defines the time period during which the IDMT protection
starting time is stored after the starting has dropped out. Should starting recur during the
hold time period then the time of the renewed starting will be added to the time period
stored. When the starting times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the
P63x then the corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the
hold time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated
starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the characteristic
set. In figure 3-115 the effect of hold time is shown by the example of a phase current
stage.
3 Operation
(continued)
3-115
The effect of the hold time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example
Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached.
Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.
3-181
3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
3-116
General starting
Counters of the IDMT

protection function
3-117
3-182
A general starting is triggered if the current in one phase exceeds the 1.05-fold of the set
reference current value. It can be selected whether the starting of the negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in the general
starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A signal is issued when the
time period of this stage has elapsed.
The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Counters of the IDMT protection function

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Groups THRM1 and THRM2)

The thermal overload protection function has been designed for overload protection of
transformers. Function group THRM1 is available in all devices of the P63x product
family (P631, P632, P633 and P634) whereas function group THRM2 is available only in
the P633 and P634 devices. Function group THRM1 will serve as an example to
illustrate the operation of the thermal overload protection functions. Accordingly, the
same is valid for function group THRM2.
The measured values to be monitored by the respective thermal overload protection
functions are selected using a setting parameter. With the P633 and P634, these can
also be quantities formed by summation of the current values from two user-selected
transformer ends. With the P631 and P632, the 'Current summation' setting has no
effect.
3-183
3 Operation
(continued)
3-118
3-184
Selection of measured values for thermal overload protection

3 Operation
(continued)
thermal overload protection
3-119
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
3-185
3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of thermal
overload protection
3-120
3-186
Thermal overload protection will issue the T H E R M : N o t r e a d y signal if one of the

following conditions applies:
Thermal overload protection is disabled.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant temperature

(ambient) acquisition.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
T H E R M : N o t r e a d y signal
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The maximum phase current IP,max.y of the selected transformer end is used to track a
first-order thermal replica according to IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern
the tripping parameters:
The set thermal time constant () of the protected object

THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
The tripping threshold trip set at T H E R M : R e l . O / T t r i p P S x
The accumulated thermal load 0
The updated measured coolant temperature c for the protected object
The maximum permissible coolant temperature c,max

set at T H R M 1 : M a x . p e r m . c o o l . t m p P S x
The maximum permissible object temperature max

set at T H R M 1 : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x
The object temperature is calculated from the current IP,max.y and can be displayed at
T H R M 1 : O b j e c t t e m p e r a t . , T H 1 . The coolant temperature is either measured via
the PT 100 input or via a 20 mA input, or a default temperature value is used instead.
This choice is governed by the setting at T H R M 1 : Se l e c t C T A PSx. The coolant
temperature is displayed at T H R M 1 : C o o l a n t te m p . T H 1 . The difference between
the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the
coolant can be displayed at T H R M 1 : O / T f . I r e f p e r s i s t 1
The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
I
ref
t = ln
2
I
c ,max
trip 1 c
I
max
c , max
ref
The setting for the operating mode selects an 'absolute' or 'relative' replica. If the setting
is for 'Absolute replica', the P63x will operate with a fixed trip threshold trip of 100 %.
3-187
3 Operation
(continued)
trip / %
10000
200
1000
110
/min
50
100
200
110
10
50
t/min
200
1000
110
30
50
0.1
0.01
0.00
10
11
I/Iref
D5Z50BE
3-121
3-188
Tripping characteristic of the thermal overload protection. Tripping characteristics apply to 0 = 0 % and identical settings for the
maximum permissible coolant and the updated measurement of the object temperature.
3 Operation
(continued)
Coolant temperature
acquisition
To permit acquisition of the coolant temperature, an analogue I/O module Y must be

fitted to the P63x. If this module is not present then the setting at
T H R M 1 : D e f a u l t C T A PS x is used in the calculation of the tripping time.
The setting at T H R M 1 : B l . f . C T A f a u l t P S x defines whether the thermal
overload protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant
temperature acquisition.
3-122
Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition (ambient temperature input)
3-189
3 Operation
(continued)
Warning signal
A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the warning level set at
T H R M 1 : R e l . O / T w a r n i n g P S x . Moreover, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip
time) can be set. When the time left until tripping falls below the setting at
T H R M 1 : W a r n i n g p r e - tr i p PSx, a warning signal will be issued.
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the
time constant set at T H R M 1 : T i m . c o n s t 2 , < I b l P S x . The thermal replica may
be reset from the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal
input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal
overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-190
3 Operation
(continued)
3-123
Thermal overload protection
3-191
3 Operation
(continued)
3-124
3-192
Resetting the thermal replica
3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)

The time-voltage protection function is not provided by the P631.
The two-stage time-voltage protection function provided by the P63x evaluates the
fundamental wave of the phase voltages.
V<> protection
V<> protection readiness
3-125
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters. Moreover, enabling
can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltagemeasuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
3-193
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
The P63x checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below a set
threshold. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands, then it is
recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always
be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
Furthermore, time-voltage protection provides a time-window for each timer stage.
The windows are defined by the setting V< > : Vm i n PSx as lower threshold for both
timer stages and by the set operate value V< or V< < of the relevant timer stage and
parameter subset as upper threshold. With an appropriate setting of the successive
timer stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as
encountered in switching operations.
3-126
3-194
Overvoltage monitoring
3 Operation
(continued)
3-127
Undervoltage monitoring
3-195
3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)

The frequency protection function is not provided with the P631.
The P63x monitors the voltage to determine whether its frequency exceeds or falls below
set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the
zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection
function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be
explained below using the first stage as an example.
over-/underfrequency
protection
3-128
3-196
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection
3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and

evaluation time
Over-/ underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of adequate magnitude.

Over-/ underfrequency protection will be blocked without delay if the measuring voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or
interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be
satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be
issued.
3-129
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
3-197
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/

underfrequency protection
Frequency monitoring
combined with differential
frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
3-198
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose
between the following operating modes:
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t)
Depending on the setting, the P63x monitors the frequency to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set
nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds
the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set,
the P63x checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold.
If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to
being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for
overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for
underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate
conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3 Operation
(continued)
combined with mean
frequency gradient
monitoring (f/t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean
value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be
set for 'underfrequency monitoring'.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of
frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within the set
time t, then the t/f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function, then the t/f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3-130
Operation of frequency monitoring combined with f/t monitoring
3-199
3 Operation
(continued)
3-131
3-200
First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
3 Operation
(continued)
fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for
the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two
following measured event values are available:
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency
or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
3-201
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f)

The overfluxing protection function will detect an inadmissibly high induction B in the iron
core of transformers which may have been caused either by a voltage increase and/or a
frequency decrease.
overfluxing protection
3-132
202
The overfluxing protection function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Disabling or enabling overfluxing protection
3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning the measured

value
3-133
The overfluxing protection function will evaluate the voltage to frequency (V/f) ratio
referred to nominal values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the iron core of a
transformer. The overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless the voltage and
frequency values are within limits for admissible values.
Conditioning of measured value
203
3 Operation
(continued)
Fixed-time warning stage
3-134
204
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold.
A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold and a signal
is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
Warning stage
3 Operation
(continued)
Fixed-time tripping stage
3-135
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold.
A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold and a signal
is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
Fixed-time tripping stage
205
3 Operation
(continued)
Variable-time tripping stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set
threshold. When the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold the P63x will determine
the tripping time according to the overfluxing magnitude value and the set characteristic.
The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing values
and their associated tripping time values. Intermediate values are obtained by
interpolation. The setting of the characteristic is checked for plausibility with regard to a
monotonically decreasing characteristic. With values of V/f > 1.6 the tripping time is
limited to the value set for V/f = 1.6. The tripping characteristic with default setting
values is displayed in Figure 3-136.
100
t/s 10
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
1.60
1.70
1.80
1.90
2.00
2.10
V/f
64Z5198A_EN
3-136
206
Example of a tripping characteristic (default setting)
3 Operation
(continued)
After a starting, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. When the starting
drops out, the buffer memory is discharged. The discharge gradient is defined by the set
cooling time. When the starting recurs the buffer memory is again accumulated with
starting time values. If the accumulated starting time reaches the tripping time value
determined by the P63x then the trip signal will be issued. The buffer memory content
during an interrupted starting is shown in Figure 3-137. In case A, the tripping time
determined by the P63x is not reached by the accumulated starting time. In case B, on
the other hand, a trip signal is issued
3-137
Buffer memory content during a starting
207
3 Operation
(continued)
3-138
208
Variable-time tripping stage

3 Operation
(continued)
3-139
Resetting of the thermal replica
209
3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Current Transformer Supervision (Function Group CTS)

As of version P63x 606, a new current transformer supervision function has been
implemented which can prevent unwanted tripping by differential protection for faults in
the CT's secondary circuit.
Hardware requirement
Disabling and enabling the

CTS function
This function can only be used if the new processor board with DSP coprocessor is
fitted!
The current transformer supervision function can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter
subset.
CTS: General
enable USER
[ 031 085 ]
0
1
CTS: Enabled
[ 036 080 ]
&
0: no
1: yes
CTS: Enable
PSx
[
*
]
0
1
0: no
x
1: yes
1
2
3
4
PSS: PS x active
[
*
]
PSS: PS x active
eingeschaltet
036 090
036 091
036 092
036 093
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
CTS:
PSx
001
001
001
001
Enable
118
119
120
121
64Z5300 B_EN
3-140
3-210
Disabling or enabling the CT Supervision
3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking CTS
Current transformer supervision is blocked if one of the following conditions applies:

Protection is disabled (off).
The CTS function is not enabled.
An external blocking signal is present.
The general trip signal is present.
Inrush stabilization or overfluxing restraint have operated.
MAIN: Protection
active
>1
CTS: blocked
CTS: Enabled
[ 036 080 ]
CTS: Blocking EXT
[ 036 160 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal
[ 036 251 ]
DIFF: Harm.block 1
trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: Harm.block 2
trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF: Harm.block 3
trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.1
trigg.
[ 041 121 ]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.2
trigg.
[ 041 122 ]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.3
trigg.
[ 041 123 ]
3-141
>1
>1
64Z5301 A_EN
Blocking of current transformer supervision
3-211
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring condition
If CTS is ready, it will monitor the positive- and negative-sequence currents from all
transformer ends (2 to 4 ends depending on the device type). A CT fault is detected
when the following conditions are simultaneously present:
The positive-sequence current exceeds the set threshold Ipos> in at least 2 winding
ends. This means that CTS can operate only if a minimum load current is present in
the protected object.
The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio exceeds a high set threshold value
Ineg/Ipos>> in a single winding end.
In all the other ends, the negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is smaller than
the low set threshold value Ineg/Ipos>, or no significant current is present (i.e. the
positive-sequence current is lower than the Ipos> threshold).
In such a case, there is a fault in the secondary circuit of the CT at the transformer end
where a high negative-sequence current is present.
Because this function uses negative-sequence currents, it can only detect unbalanced
CT faults. In practice, this does not present a problem as the occurrence of a three-pole
CT fault is very unlikely.
3-212
3 Operation
(continued)
CTS:
blocked
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049
CTS: Ipos>
c [
*
IA,y
IC,y
IC,y
PSx
]
Ipos
Ipos>,y
Ineg
CTS: Ineg/Ipos>
c PSx
[
*
]
Ineg/Ipos
Ineg/Ipos>,y
CTS: Ineg/Ipos>>
c PSx
[
*
]
*
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
CTS: Ipos>
PSx
001 111
001 115
001 116
001 117
CTS: Ineg/Ipos>
PSx
001 102
001 103
001 104
001 105
CTS: Ineg/
Ipos>>
PSx
001 122
001 123
001 124
001 125
Ineg/Ipos>>,y
64Z5302 A
3-142
Current evaluation referring to the respective end
3-213
3 Operation
(continued)
&
CTS: blocked
Ipos>,a
Ipos>,b
Ipos>,c
Ipos>,d
>2
>1
Ineg/Ipos>,a
>1
=(N-1)
Note
N = Number of ends:
P631, P632: N = 2 (a and b)
P633: N = 3 (a ... c)
P634: N = 4 (a ... d)
Ineg/Ipos>,b
>1
Ineg/Ipos>,c
>1
Ineg/Ipos>,d
Ineg/Ipos>>,a
Ineg/Ipos>>,b
Ineg/Ipos>>,c
Ineg/Ipos>>,d
=1
&
CTS: End a faulty
&
CTS: End b faulty
&
CTS: End c faulty
&
CTS: End d faulty
64Z5303A
3-143
3-214
CTS triggering condition
3 Operation
(continued)
Signaling and indication
Triggering of the CTS function is signaled by multiple signals as well as by single signals
referring to the respective ends. Beside the updated signals latched signals are also
available in order to achieve stable signaling behavior and a permanent differential
protection characteristic with reduced sensitivity when, for instance, intermittent faults
have occurred. The updated signal as well as the stored signal are time-delayed in order
to suppress any signaling caused by a transient event. On the other hand,
instantaneous signals are used to block or restrain the differential protection functions as
fast as possible.
As soon as a CTS condition is detected (C T S : I d i f f > ( C T S ) a c t i v e is present),
the function will raise the differential protection low set threshold to the
D I F F : I d i f f > ( C T S ) setting:
Idiff
Fault current characteristic

for single-side infeed
m2
Idiff>(CTS)
1
m1
Idiff>
0
IR,m2
IR
64Z6030A_EN
3-144
Modification of the differential protection triggering characteristic with CTS active
The setting for this value determines the CTS operating mode:
Signaling only: D I F F : Id i f f > ( C T S ) PSx = D I F F : I d i f f> P S x .
Differential protection remains unrestricted, but there is a risk of unwanted
tripping occurring under load current.
Restricted operation: DIFF : Idi ff> (CT S) PSx = maximum load current.
This will permit the safe differential protection behavior, even during CT failure:
there will be no unwanted trip under any load condition, but protection will remain
operational for internal faults with currents exceeding the load current).
Blocking: D IF F : Id i f f>( C T S) P S x = D IF F : Id if f > > P S x .
In practice differential protection is blocked for all currents under normal
operating conditions.
When one of the C T S : A l a r m e n d y signals is issued, the associated ground
differential protection function is then blocked, if it has been set accordingly
(R E F _ n : C T S e f f e c t i v e P S x = 'Yes' by assigning REF_n to end y).
3-215
3 Operation
(continued)
Reset
Latched CTS signals can be reset using control parameters or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input as well as by a general reset command.
Multiple signaling from the

CTS function
The signals issued by the CTS function (and/or measuring circuit monitoring, see
description of MCM_x) are combined into the M A I N : M e a s . c i r c . I f a u l t y signal.
A signal is simultaneously issued by the self-monitoring function.
CTS: t(Alarm)
PSx
[
*
]
>1
CTS: End a faulty

CTS: End b faulty
CTS: Operated
(updating)
[ 036 099 ]
MAIN: Meas. circ.I
faulty
[ 036 155 ]
CTS: End c faulty

CTS: t(Latch)
PSx
[
*
]
CTS: End d faulty
SFMON: Meas. circ.I

faulty
[ 091 018 ]
0
S
11
CTS: Operated
(latched)
[ 036 202 ]
CTS: Idiff>(CTS)
active
[ 036 203 ]
>1
CTS: Reset latch.

USER
[ 036 157 ]
0
1
100 ms
>1
500 ms
CTS: Reset
0: don't execute
1: execute
CTS: Reset
latching EXT
[ 036 158 ]
MAIN: General
reset
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
3-145
3-216
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
CTS: t(Alarm)
PSx
001 126
001 127
001 128
001 129
CTS: t(Latch)
PSx
001 130
001 131
001 132
001 133
64Z5304 B_EN
CTS overreaching signals
3 Operation
(continued)
CTS: t(Alarm)
PSx
[
*
]
CTS: Alarm end y

(updat.)
[
*
]
CTS: End y faulty
CTS: Meas. c. I
faulty, y
[
*
]
CTS: t(Latch)
PSx
[
*
]
CTS: Reset
0
S
1 1
CTS: Alarm end y

(latch.)
[
*
]
CTS: Alarm end y
[
*
]
>1
End
a
b
c
d
CTS : Alarm end

y (updat .)
CTS : Alarm end

y ( latch .)
036
036
036
036
036
036
036
036
081
082
083
084
204
206
208
210
CTS: Alarm
end y
036 205
036 207
036 209
036 211
CTS: Meas. c.
I faulty, y
091 026
091 027
091 028
091 029
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
CTS: t(Alarm)
PSx
001 126
001 127
001 128
001 129
CTS: t(Latch)
PSx
001 130
001 131
001 132
001 133
64Z5305 B_EN
3-146
CTS signals per end
3-217
3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 to MCM_4)

The measuring-circuit monitoring function featured by the P63x will detect faults in the
CTs' secondary circuits. Measuring-circuit monitoring functions MCM_1, MCM_2,
MCM_3 or MCM_4 are permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored by the
P63x . Function group MCM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
measuring-circuit monitoring functions. The same will apply to function groups MCM_2,
MCM_3 and MCM_4.
measuring-circuit
monitoring
3-147
3-218
The measuring-circuit monitoring function can be disabled or enabled using setting

parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring
3 Operation
(continued)
Measuring circuit
monitoring
The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is used as a criterion for measuringcircuit monitoring. The measuring-circuit monitoring function is triggered when the set
ratio value, Ineg / Ipos, is exceeded and either the negative- or the positive-sequence
current exceeds 0.02 Inom. After the set operate time-delay has elapsed, a warning is
issued.
As of version 606, the previously available measuring-circuit monitoring functions which

were based on the phase currents per end, have been enhanced and can now be used
to detect broken conductors on the CTs' primary sides.
The functions can now be blocked individually via input signals set at
MCM_x: Blocking EXT.
When the triggering condition is met an instantaneous starting signal is raised:
(MCM_x: Starting).
The enhanced function is displayed, as an example, by function group MCM_1 in the
logic diagram below.
MCM_1: Blocking EXT

[ 036 213 ]
MCM_1: Enabled
[ 036 194 ]
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
Ineg
> 0.02
Inom
Ipos
> 0.02
Inom
>1
MCM_1: Ineg/Ipos>
c PSx
[
*
]
MCM_1: Operate
c delay PSx
[
*
]
5s
Ineg/Ipos
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MCM_1: Ineg/
Ipos>
PSx
081 042
082 042
083 042
084 042
MCM_1: Operate
delay PSx
081 046
082 046
083 046
084 046
MCM_1: Meas. circ.

I faulty
[ 036 198 ]
SFMON: Meas. c. I
faulty, a
[ 091 026 ]
MCM_1: Starting
[ 036 212 ]
64Z5187 B_EN
3-148
Measuring-circuit monitoring for end a
3-219
3 Operation
(continued)
Multiple signaling from the

measuring circuit
monitoring function
3-149
3-220
The signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring function (and/or current
transformer supervision, see description of CTS) are grouped to form the
M A I N : M e a s . c i r c . I f a u l t y multiple signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by
the self-monitoring function.
Signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring function
3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)

The limit value monitoring function (LIMIT) monitors measured values which have been
obtained from the analog measured data inputs.
Enabling/disabling the Limit
Value Monitoring function
Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured
values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after the associated
time-delay has elapsed.
3-221
3 Operation
(continued)
3-150
3-222
Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the measured

temperature value
3-151
The temperature that is measured by the P63x using a resistance thermometer is

monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it
exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time-delay has
elapsed.
Monitoring the measured temperature value
3-223
3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Limit Value Monitoring of Phase Currents

(Function Groups LIM_1 to LIM_3)
Each of the limit value monitoring functions, LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3, is designed for
the monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a user-selected
transformer end.
Enabling or disabling limit
value monitoring
Monitoring minimum and

maximum phase currents
Limit value monitoring functions LIM_n can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters.
In the P631 and P632, two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are
implemented and can be assigned to both transformer ends.
In the P633 and the P634, three limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1, LIM_2 and
LIM_3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends
(a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed
by current summation over two user-selected transformer ends.
For each limit value monitoring function, a setting parameter is provided for this
assignment by the user. The function will then monitor the minimum and maximum
phase currents for the selection. If a maximum phase current exceeds the relevant set
threshold or if a minimum phase current falls below the relevant set threshold, a signal is
issued once a set time has elapsed. Function group LIM_1 will serve as an example to
illustrate the operation of the limit value monitoring functions in the following figures.
3-224
3 Operation
(continued)
3-152
Selection of measured values

3-225
3 Operation
(continued)
3-153
3-226
Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P63x may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the
option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . A s s i g n m . O u t p . n ,
where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to
the signals generated by the P63x, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set via setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces.
Depending on the device type the P63x provides up to 40 binary signal inputs.
As of version P63x -602 the respective number of binary input signals
L O G I C : I n p u t 1 E X T to L O G I C : I n p u t 4 0 E X T are provided in order to be able
to process these binary input signals.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 40) have an updating
function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched.
The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for
L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T )
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions
is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the input signals of the
two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of
1 ), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application.
In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic
linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during
operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
3-227
3 Operation
(continued)
3-154
Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
3-228
3 Operation
(continued)
LOGIC: General
enable USER
[ 031 099 ]
LOGIC: Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0: no
1: yes
MAIN: Protection
active
LOGIC: Fct.
assignm. outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
306 001
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: Op. mode

t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
LOGIC: Input 1
EXT
[ 034 000 ]
LOGIC: Input 40
EXT
[ 034 109 ]
LOGIC: 1 has been

set
[ 034 067 ]
LOGIC: 8 has been

set
[ 034 074 ]
0: Without timer
stage
1: Oper./
releas.delay
LOGIC: 1 set
externally
[ 034 075 ]
2: Oper.del./
puls.dur.
LOGIC: Time t1
output 1
[ 030 002 ]
LOGIC: Time t2
output 1
[ 030 003 ]
3: Op./
rel.delay,retrig
LOGIC: 8 set
externally
[ 034 082 ]
4: Op.del./
puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC: Output
1(t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC: Set 1 USER

[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC: Set 8 USER

[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC: Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
LOGIC: Output 1
[ 042 032 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
LOGIC: Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
3-155
64Z60CDA_EN
Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
3-229
3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order equation as an
input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The equations
are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation. It should be noted
that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation with the
highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This makes it possible to assign a freely
configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In the
'Minimum time' operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures 3156 to 3-160 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes.
Note:
3-156
3-230
If the device is switched to "offline" the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to a logic value of ' 0 '.
Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
3 Operation
(continued)
3-157
Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-158
Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable
3-231
3 Operation
(continued)
3-159
Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable
3-160
Operating mode 5: Minimum time
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
3-232
3 Operation
(continued)
3-161
Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
3-233
3 Operation
(continued)
3-234
4 Design
Design
The P63x is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.
The P63x like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 range is equipped with the
standard local control panel (LOC). The local control panel is covered with a tough film
so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the
essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED
indicators is also incorporated into the local control panel. The meaning of the various
LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the local control panel.
4.1
Designs
The P63x is available in the following case widths:
P631 and P632 in 40TE case
P633 in 40TE or 84TE case
P634 in 84TE case
The P63x is available in the following case designs:
Surface-Mounted Case
Flush Mounted Case
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded
terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device
after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, c) and removing
the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs
in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, d). The flush-mounted case is
connected at the back of the case.
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting

cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in
the slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
4-1
4 Design
(continued)
4-1
4-2
Surface-mounted case, removal of front panel HMI
4 Design
(continued)
4-2
Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 40TE case
4-3
4 Design
(continued)
62Y5001A_Xa_EN
4-3
4-4
Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 84TE case
4 Design
(continued)
4-4
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the next
page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
4-5
4 Design
(continued)
4-5
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame)
As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this
4-6
4 Design
(continued)
4-6
As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the next
4-7
4 Design
(continued)
62Y5103B_Xa_EN
4-7
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 84TE case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame)
As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this
4-8
4 Design
(continued)
4.2
Modules
The P63x is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P63x.
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, {: optional, z: standard
equipment, : depending on order).
Index Description
0336 426
J ff
9650 107
A
A
0336 428
9650 356
A
A
A
P634
P634
4T
4T
G ff
4T
ff
Communication module 2 (for wire connection)
4T
9650 354
ff
9650 355
X 9651 426
A
A
A
X 9651 427
Communication module 2
4T
ff
(For glass fiber, ST connector)

Communication module 2 (For plastic fiber)
4T
ff
Communication module2 (IRIG-B only)
4T
ff
Ethernet module (For 10 MHz Ethernet, glass fiber,

ST connector and RJ45 wire)
4T
ff
Ethernet module (For 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fiber,

SC connector and RJ45 wire)
4T
0336 187
ff * Bus module (digital)
4T
z 40TE
only
0336 188
ff * Bus module (digital)
4T
0337 870
ff * Bus module (analog)
4T
ff * Local control module (Western European)
4T
ff * Local control module (Cyrillic)
4T
ff
Processor module, 25 MHz
4T
ff
Processor module, 33 MHz
4T
T 9650 329
D
C
B
B
C
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
9650 353
L 9650 443
P 0337 875
P 9650 135
z 84TE
only
z
z
z
ff
Processor module, DSP
4T
ff
Transformer module 6 x I (pin connection)
8T
ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 1 x V (pin connection)
8T
ff
8T
ff
8T
ff
Transformer module 6 x I (ring connection)
8T
ff
Transformer module 4 x I, 1 x V (ring connection)
8T
ff
8T
ff
8T
V 0337 437
E ff
Power supply module 24 V DC

Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
4T
V 9651 300
ff
Power supply module 24 V DC,

switching threshold 73 V
V 9651 328
ff
V 9651 439
V 9651 356
P 9651 428
T 9650 310
T 9650 311
T 9650 312
T 9650 328
T 9650 324
T 9650 325
T 9650 326
P631 P632
(For glass fiber, ST connector)

Communication module 1 (For plastic fiber)
L 9650 194
ff
Communication module 1 (for wire connection)

Communication module 1
Width
4T

4T
ff

4T
ff

4T
Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, without IRIG-B

Required for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 protocols, with IRIG-B
4-9
4 Design
(continued)
P634
P634
V 0337 191
Index Description
M ff
Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC /

100 to 230 V AC,
4T
V 9651 301
ff

100 to 230 V AC,
4T
V 9651 329
ff

100 to 230 V AC,
4T
V 9651 437
ff

100 to 230 V AC,
4T
V 9651 357
ff

100 to 230 V AC,
4T
X 0337 971
ff
Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays),

4T
X 9651 306
ff

4T
X 9651 334
ff

4T
X 9651 445
ff

4T
X 9651 362
ff

4T
X 0336 973
ff
Binary module (6 output relays)
4T
ff
Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with triacs) 4T
X 0337 612
B
B
A
ff
Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs),

4T
X 9651 304
ff

4T
X 9651 332
ff

4T
X 9651 443
ff

4T
X 9651 360
ff

4T
Y 0337 406
ff
Analog I/O module,

4T
84TE
Y 9651 307
ff
Analog I/O module, switching threshold 73 V
4T
84TE
Y 9651 335
ff
4T
84TE
Y 9651 446
ff
4T
84TE
Y 9651 363
ff
4T
84TE
X 9650 341
Width
P631 P632
only
only
only
only
only
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40TE in width
(H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of
the threaded terminal blocks in the P63x are shown in figures 4-8 to 4-17.
4-10
4 Design
(continued)
4-8
Location diagram for P631 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection

The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown Figure 4-17.
4-11
4 Design
(continued)
4-9
Location diagram for P631 in 40TE case, ring-terminal connection

4-12
4 Design
(continued)
4-10 Location diagram for P632 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection

4-13
4 Design
(continued)
4-11 Location diagram for P632 in 84TE case, ring-terminal connection

4-14
4 Design
(continued)

4-15
4 Design
(continued)

4-16
4 Design
(continued)

4-17
4 Design
(continued)

4-18
4 Design
(continued)

4-19
4 Design
(continued)
02
-X8 *
-X12
-X13 *
-X7 *
-X10
01
Type
A
*
01
02
: Alternative module
(see order information)
Type
Designation
Communication module
Slot
Item
02
-U17; -U18; -U20; -U25; -U26
Px3x_Ethernet_01A_EN
4-17 Location diagram for Ethernet board

valid for:
40TE
40TE
84TE
84TE
4-20
case,
case,
case,
case,
pin terminal connection,

ring terminal connection,
pin terminal connection,
ring terminal connection
5 Installation and Connection
Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the Protective and Operational Grounding section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
5.1
Unpacking and Packing
All P63x units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not
use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should
be filed in carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper
mechanical condition.
If the P63x needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height 0.8 m.
5.2
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P63x can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the
upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the side of the
device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the P63x
packaging.
5-1

(continued)
P63x
P634-XXXXXXX-304-403-610-801
Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V
Inom = 1 / 5 A
Diagram
IN,nom = 1 / 5
A
UH,nom =
UN,nom = 24
Specification
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1
IEP,nom =
P634.403
xx.yy
fnom = 50/60 Hz
... 250 V DC
CE
F 6.xxxxxx.y
P63x type identification label; illustrated for the example of a P634 with order number P634-XXXXXXX-304-403-610-801
The P63x design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the supporting documents
supplied with the unit.
5.3
Location Requirements
The P63x has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is
important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of
these important operating conditions are listed below.
Mechanical conditions
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage of the
power supply
Electromagnetic conditions
5-2
Ambient temperature:
-5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F]
Air pressure:
800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity:
The relative humidity must not result in the formation of

either condensed water or ice in the P63x.
Ambient air:
The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,

smoke, gases or vapors, or salt content.
Solar radiation:
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be

avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
Vibration stress:
or
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g

10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
(see section "Mechanical Robustness" in Chapter 2)
Earthquake resistance:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,

3 x 1 cycle
Operating range:
0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.

(continued)
5.4
Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P63x is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P63x is
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back,
an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figures 5-2 and
5-3 show such an opening below the surface-mounted case.
5-2
Opening for running the wiring to the surface-mounted 40TE case
(dimensions in mm)
5-3

(continued)
5-3
5-4
Opening for running the wiring to the surface-mounted 84TE case
(dimensions in mm)

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting
dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P63x is mounted on a cabinet door,
special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for
the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 5-4 to 5-6 show the required panel cutouts for flushmounted cases of different case widths.
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:
As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if either the surfacemounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test
severity class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1
of the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
5-4
As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this
5-5

(continued)
5-5
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 40TE case, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
As of May 2005, the P63x has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on
this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
5-6

(continued)
5-6
As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this
5-7

(continued)
5-7
Panel cutout for the flush-mounted 84TE case, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Before the P63x can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must be
removed. The local control panel is removed as described below:
5-8
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged
flaps 180up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side
mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
Remove the M3 screws (see Figure 5-8).
Then remove the local control panel.

cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the connecting cable.

(continued)
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see Figure 5-8).
Now insert the P63x into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit
into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this, replace the
local control panel.
Note:
5-8
If the control panel thickness is 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
Installation of a 40TE case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40TE case.
As of May 2005, the P63x has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the
next page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: see figure 5-13
5-9

(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
5-9
5-10
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-9, c and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see
Figure 5-10).
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
Mounting the angle brackets

(continued)
5-10
Installation of a 40TE case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
5-11

(continued)
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine the 40TE case with a second sub-rack to
form a 19" mounting rack (see Figure 5-11). The extra sub-rack can be another device,
for example, or an empty sub-rack with a blank front panel. Fit the 19" mounting rack to a
cabinet as shown in Figure P63x.
5-11
Combining flush-mounted 40TE cases to form a 19" mounting rack

5-12

(continued)
5-12
Fitting a 19" mounting rack

5-13

(continued)
5.5
Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section
of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept
as short as possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-13
Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.

The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
5-14

(continued)
5.6
Connection
The P63x must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in
the supporting documents supplied with the device. The terminal connection diagrams
that apply to the P63x are also to be found in the Appendix to this operating manual.
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm are sufficient to connect a
system current transformer to a current input on the P63x. To reduce CT knee-point
voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a
greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on
the P63x. Copper conductors with a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to connect
the binary signal inputs, the signaling and tripping circuits and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1
Power supply
Current-measuring inputs
Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P63x power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
Connecting the measuring

circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-14 . It is essential that the grounding configuration
shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be
taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
5-15

(continued)
5-14
5-16
Standard schematic connection diagram for the P63x


(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
5-15
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-15). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.
Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable.

The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal connection
diagrams. This is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary
inputs can be made as desired.
5-17

(continued)
5.6.2
Connecting the IRIG-B Interface
An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3
PC interface
Connecting the Serial Interfaces
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal
computer (PC).
Communication interface
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female

connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that
is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a

control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication
interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
5-18
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.

(continued)
An RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be
established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master
could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication
master, e.g. P63x, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P63x was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices.
Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex
transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must
be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly
in accordance with specifications.
All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both

ends.
Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible.

A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link.
A 2-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-16, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-17
as an example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if
channel 1 on the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically
with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P63x. The two devices situated at
either far end must have a 200 to 220 resistor installed to terminate the data
transmission conductor. In most Schneider Electric MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in
the P63x, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be
connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the
data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically
full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P63x, are
connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of
slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped
electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave
device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver
terminated with a 200 to 220 resistor each. In most Schneider Electric MiCOM Px3x
devices, and also in the P63x, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface
hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not
necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor
order number see Chapter 13).
5-19

(continued)
P63x
Last participant
connected to the line
First participant
(e.g. the master)
P63x
Device with half-duplex
interface
64Z608 0A_EN
5-16
5-20
2-wire data link

(continued)
P63x
First participant
(e.g. the master)
Last participant
P63x
Device with half-duplex
interface
64Z6081 A_EN
5-17
4-wire data link
5-21
5-22
6 Local Control Panel
6
Local control panel
Local Control Panel
All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well.
The following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
Readout and modification of settings
Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and a
specific operating program.
6-1

(continued)
6.1
Control and display
elements
Display and Keypad
The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric

characters, seven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
= CLEAR
= REAS
G
G
= ENTR
6-1
6-2
View of the local control panel

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a
quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the panel level
allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured values, etc.) and to
change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the panel
.
level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the "READ" key
Measured Value
Panels
Recordings
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Parameters
Operation
Events
Device ID
Cyclic measurements
Event counters
Configuration parameters
Function parameters
Global
General functions
Parameter subset 1
Control and testing

Measured fault data

Event recordings

Physical state signals
Logic state signals
Parameter subset ...
Menu tree
6-2
Display panels and menu tree
6-3

(continued)
Display panels
The P63x can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the
device according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and
the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Menu tree and data points
List data points
6-4
All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user.
The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are
displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as
selected by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning,
and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping
matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sublevel is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value
elements are linked by operators such as OR.

(continued)
Short description of keys

Up and Down Keys
/
Panel Level:
The up/down keys switch between the pages of the
Measured Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the up and down keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the up and down keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the up and down keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(Up key:
The next higher value is selected.
Down key:
The next lower value is selected.)
With list parameters, the linking operator for the value element is changed by
pressing the up and down keys.
/
Left and Right Keys
Menu Tree Level:
Press the left and right keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the left and right keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(Left key:
The cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
Right key:
The cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list parameter, the user can navigate through the list of items
available for selection by pressing the left and right keys.
G
ENTER Key
Panel Level:
Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode:
When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input
mode is exited.
6-5

(continued)
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can
be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the
enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated.
The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in
this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.2
Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.

Control Step / Description
Display
0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
jump to the Panel Level from any position

within the menu tree.
1 First press the up key and hold it down
Jumping from Menu Tree

Level to Panel Level
Control
Action
while pressing the CLEAR key.
Voltage C-A prim.

20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
Note:
It is important to press the up key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
0 Example of a Measured Value Panel.
Voltage C-A prim.

20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel
XX YYY
Jumping from Panel Level to

Menu Tree Level
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC'), the display
will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been
configured.
6-6

(continued)
6.3
Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
"hold" time has elapsed (Backlight time setting in the menu tree at Par/Conf/LOC).
Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case
the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation
of the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time illumination is set
to blocked.
6.4
Control at Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the
section entitled Setting a List Parameter for instructions regarding selection. If the
M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.
Control
Action
Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
0 Up to six selected measured values can be

displayed simultaneously on the Panel.
been selected, they can be viewed one page at

a time by pressing the up or down keys. The
device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time
for Panels (setting in menu tree:
'Par/Conf/LOC') has elapsed.
1 If more than two measured values have
Display
or
Voltage C-A prim.

20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
6-7

(continued)
6.5
6.5.1
Folders and function
groups
Control at the Menu Tree Level

Navigation in the Menu Tree
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
Parameters, Operation and Events, which form the first folder level. Up to two further
folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and
a maximum of three folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
Folder
level 1
PX yyy
Parameters
Folder
level 2
Folder
level 3
Function
groups
Data
points
6-3
6-8
PX yyy
Operation
PX yyy
Events
Oper/
Cyclic measurements
Oper/Cycl/
Meas. operating data
Oper/Cycl/Data/
MAIN
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Date
01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
Basic menu tree structure

(continued)
6.5.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions.
In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.
Control
Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
text mode to address mode.
1 To switch from address mode to plain text
Display
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or

either the left key or the right key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
0
6-9
9

(continued)
6.5.3
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode.
This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the Param. change enabl.
parameter to Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the
section entitled Password-Protected Control Actions) are enabled without entering
the password.
Password input prior to any setting change.
Selective change-enabling
function
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section
entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly.
Control
Action
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
right
left
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Eight asterisks (*)

appear in the fourth line of the display.
the Param. change enabl. parameter.
1 Press the ENTER key.
up
6-10
down.
The display will change as shown in the
column on the right.
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
********
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*

(continued)
Control
Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This
indicates that the setting can now be changed
by pressing the up or down keys.
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
The LED
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for
further setting changes.
4 Press the ENTER key again.
3 Change the setting to Yes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.
6-11
11

(continued)
Automatic return
Forced return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time
(menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
disabled, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing
the up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note:
It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree:
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system.
The following entries in the "Change" column of the address list indicate whether values
can be changed or not:
"on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.
"off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled.
"-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-12

(continued)
6.5.4
Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.
Control
Action
0 Example of a display.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
In this example, the change-enabling function

is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
G
keys.
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the
The LED indicator

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
G
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
The LED indicator

labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.
cursor to the left or right.
by pressing the up and down keys. In the

meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
3 Press the left or right keys to move the
Display
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled

EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key.
The LED indicator will go out and the device
will continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
6-13
13

(continued)
6.5.5
Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number m that can be
selected out of the total number n of the set is given in the address list in the Remarks
column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an OR operator.
Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC
function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary
input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user
requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a
setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used
here as an illustration.
Control
Action
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at

Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN in the menu tree).
The down arrow () indicates that a list setting
has been selected.
G
G
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions

by pressing the right and left keys.
The first function and

the first selected signal will appear in the third
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol
#01 in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Without function appears
for the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has been made yet.
1 Press the down key.
Once the end of the list is reached, the display

shown on the right will appear.
5 Select the operator or the class using the
G
G
pressing the right and left keys in the input

mode.
6-14
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE

will light up.
up and down keys. In this particular case,

only the OR operator can be selected.
There is no limitation on the selection of
classes.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#01 DIST
Trip zone 1
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by
Display
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4

(continued)
The LED indicator

will go out. The assignment has been made.
The unit will now operate with the new settings.
Control
Action
G
Display
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the OR

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while
in the list.
7 Press the up key to exit the list at any point
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled

EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go
out.
Deleting a list setting
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
If MAIN: Without function is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6.5.6
Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree Oper/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory
In the menu tree Oper/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree Events/Rec/GF_RC: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
6-15
15

(continued)
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.
Control
Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
memory.
2 Press the left key repeatedly to display the
3 Press the right key to display the previous
4 Press the up key at any point within the
G
G
entry.
entries one after the other in chronological

order. Once the end of the operating data
memory has been reached, pressing the left
key again will have no effect.
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
operating data memory to return to the entry

point.
6-16
1 Press the down key to enter the operating
Display
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
Enabled USER
Yes
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Oper/Rec/OP_RC

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an overflow signal is issued.
Control
Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
2 Press the right key repeatedly to display
3 Press the left key to display the previous
entry.
the entries one after the other in chronological

order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the overflow
signal is displayed as the last entry.
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
1 Press the down key to enter the monitoring
4 If the down key is held down while a
G
G
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry

point.
Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
Exception oper. syst.
Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the

following additional information will be
displayed:
First:
Time when the signal first occurred
Currently: The fault is still being detected
(Yes) or is no longer detected (No)
by the self-monitoring function.
Reset:
The fault was no longer detected by
the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.
Display
First:
13:33:59.744
Active: Yes
Reset:
No
Number:
5
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
6-17
17

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
Control
Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.99 10:00:33
memory, for example. If the memory contains

entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the down key to enter the fault
memory. First, the fault number is shown.

In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last
reset.
2 Press the right key repeatedly to see first
G
G
the measured fault data and then the binary

signals in chronological order. The time shown
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or
ended.
Once the end of the fault has been reached
(after the right key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the right key again will
have no effect.
G
G
3 Press the left key to see the previous
6-18
fault memory to return to the entry point.
measured value or the previous signal.
Display
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
Event
22
Fault recording 1
200 ms
FT_DA
Running time
0.17 s
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Fault recording 1
241 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.99 10:00:33

(continued)
6.5.7
Resetting
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be
the case after injection testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting.
The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated.
Control
Action
Display
0 Select the reset setting.
Line 3 of the
display shows the number of faults since the
last reset, 10 in this example.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
The LED indicator

labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Execute
The LED indicator

labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in
line 3 is reset to 0.
setting to Execute.
2 Press the up or down keys to change the
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
0
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
recordings after leaving the standard control

mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged.
Any setting can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.
6-19
19

(continued)
6.5.8
Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel (such as a manual trip command for testing
purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the
following description will apply accordingly.
Control
Action
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN,
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
right
left
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Eight asterisks (*)

select the parameter Man. trip cmd. USER.
up
down.
The display will change as shown in the
column on the right.
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
This indicates that the setting can now be
changed by pressing the up or down keys.
The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
The unit will execute the command.
6-20
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
********
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
3 Change the setting to Execute.
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute

(continued)
Control
Action
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
MODE is on, the control action can be

terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.5.9
Display
Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The left, right, up and down keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
6-21
21

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
Control
Action
0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC, select the
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
to enter the valid password. The display will

change as shown in the column on the right.
2 Press the left, right, up and down keys
Eight asterisks (*)

Password setting.
G
G
G
G
3 Now press the ENTER key.
The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
The third line shows an underscore character
( _ ) as the prompt for entering a new
password.
G
example is done by pressing the UP key

followed by the DOWN key.
Asterisks
appear in the third line, and a cursor
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user
to enter the new password again.
6-22
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
********
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
_
4 Enter the new password, which in this
Display
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_

(continued)
6 Re-enter the password.
Control
Action
G
If the
password has been re-entered correctly, the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new Password L/R is now valid.
7a Press the ENTER key again.
7b If the password has been re-entered
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT

MODE remains on and the display shown on
the right appears. The password has to be reentered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password L/R by pressing the
CLEAR key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at
Display
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR

key. If this is done, the original Password L/R
continues to be valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible.
To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled
Change-Enabling Function).
6-23
23

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.
Control
Action
Display
0 Turn off the device.
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue.
6-24
TEST
2 When this condition is detected during

startup, the password is displayed.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

beginning of device startup, press the four
directional keys (left, right, up and down) at
the same time and hold them down.
Password
1234
TEST
7 Settings
Settings
7.1
Parameters
The P63x must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located
in the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The default settings are activated after a cold restart. The P63x is blocked in that case.
All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note:
In the following tables (except for function group DVICE) an indication for the localization
of the corresponding function description is shown in the right hand side column.
"Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a
figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
7-1
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1
Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P63x. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings
should only be changed if the design version of the P63x is modified.
Device
DVICE: Device type

The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
000 000
DVICE: Software version

Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: SW date
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
002 120
002 122
002 103
DVICE: SW version communic.
Software version for the device's communication software. This display
cannot be altered.
002 059
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version
Software version of the communication software based on the device's
protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
002 123
DVICE: Language version
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
002 121
DVICE: Text vers.data model
Using the text replacement tool provided by the support software, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load
them into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier
defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is
displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier 0 (factory-set default).
002 124
DVICE: F number
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
7-2
DVICE: Order No.

Order number of the device. The user cannot alter this number.
000 001
DVICE: PCS Order No.

Order numbers (Cortec) per PCS standard.
001 200
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1

Order extension numbers for the device.
000 003
000 004
000 005
000 006
000 007
000 008
000 009
000 010
000 011
000 012
000 013
000 014
000 015
000 016
000 017
000 018
000 019
000 020
000 021
000 022
000 023
000 024
000 025
000 026
000 027
000 028
000 029
086 050
DVICE: Module var. slot 1
086 051
086 052
086 053
086 054
086 055
086 056
086 057
086 058
086 059
086 060
086 061
086 062
086 063
086 064
086 065
086 066
086 067
086 068
086 069
086 070
Item number of the module fitted to the respective slot. The display always
shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
7-3
7 Settings
(continued)
086 193
DVICE: Module vers. slot 1
086 194
086 195
086 196
086 197
086 198
086 199
086 200
086 201
086 202
086 203
086 204
086 205
086 206
086 207
086 208
086 209
086 210
086 211
086 212
086 213
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted to the respective slot.
7-4
DVICE: Variant of module A

Item number of module A in this design version.
DVICE: Version of module A
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
086 047
DVICE: MAC address module A

MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This
address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
DVICE: Variant of module L
Item number of module L in this design version.
104 061
DVICE: Version of module L

Index letter specifying the version of module L.
086 191
DVICE: Variant of module B

Item number of module B in this design version.
DVICE: Version of module B
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
086 049
DVICE: Variant module B (a)

Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
086 046
DVICE: Version module B (a)

Index letter specifying the version of the analog bus module B.
086 189
086 190
086 048
086 192
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Customer ID data 1

Set your numerically-coded user data here for your records.
000 040
DVICE: Location
Reference input for the devices location as selected by user.
001 201
DVICE: Device ID
ID code used by the support software for identification purposes. See
description of the relevant support software for more detailed setting
instructions.
000 035
DVICE: Substation ID
instructions.
000 036
DVICE: Feeder ID
instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1
instructions.
000 037
000 041
000 042
000 043
000 044
000 045
000 046
000 047
000 048
000 049
7-5
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2
Local control panel
Configuration Parameters
LOC: Language
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.
003 020
003 021
LOC: Decimal delimiter
Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel.
003 035
LOC: Password
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
080 110
LOC: Assignment read key
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
053 007 Fig. 3-2
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
053 005
Fig. 3-4
053 003 Fig. 3-3

LOC: Fct. Fault Panel
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
031 075 Fig: 3-2,3-3
LOC: Hold-time for Panels
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
003 014 Fig. 3-2
LOC: Autom. return time
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel within this set
time, the change-enabling function is disabled and the Operation Panel is
called up provided that values have been assigned to the Operation Panel
and that there is no event.
003 023
LOC: Return time illumin.
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel within this set
time, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
PC link
PC: Name of manufacturer

Setting for the manufacturer's name.
Note:
003 183
Fig. 3-5
This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
003 068 Fig. 3-5

PC: Bay address
003 069 Fig. 3-5
PC: Device address
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in
communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate

Baud rate of the PC interface.
7-6
003 081
Fig. 3-5
7 Settings
(continued)
003 181 Fig. 3-5

PC: Parity bit
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P63x.
003 187 Fig. 3-5
PC: Spontan. sig. enable
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
003 189 Fig. 3-5
PC: Select. spontan.sig.
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
003 084 Fig. 3-5
PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel.

Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
003 185
Fig. 3-5
003 055 Fig. 3-5

PC: Delta V
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
003 056 Fig. 3-5
PC: Delta I
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
003 057 Fig. 3-5
PC: Delta f
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs
by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel

The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
003 155
Fig. 3-5
003 058 Fig. 3-5

PC: Delta t
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time-delay has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
003 188 Fig. 3-5
PC: Time-out
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
056 026
COMM1: Function group COMM1
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM1: General enable USER
003 170
Fig: 3-7, 3-8,

3-9, 3-10,
3-11, 3-12
003 215
Fig. 3-6
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.

COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
7-7
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Addit. -101 enable

Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
003 216
Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable

Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable
Enabling settings relevant to the MODBUS protocol.
003 217
Fig. 3-6
003 220
Fig. 3-6
COMM1: DNP3 enable

Enabling settings relevant to the DNP 3.0 protocol.
003 231
Fig. 3-6
103 040 Fig. 3-6

COMM1: COURIER enable
Enabling settings relevant to the COURIER protocol.
003 167 Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant

The user may select between two variants of the
MODBUS protocol.
003 214
Fig. 3-10
003 165
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
COMM1: Baud rate
003 071
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM1: Parity bit
003 171
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P63x.
COMM1: Dead time monitoring
003 176
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,
3-10,3-11,
3-12
Note:
This setting visible only if the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line idle state

Setting for the line idle state indication.
The P63x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note:
This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling
003 202
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
7-8
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Octet comm. address
003 072
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-11,
3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s was:
ILSA: Bay address
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
003 240 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C OMM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note:
This setting visible only if the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test monitor on
003 166
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.

COMM1: Name of manufacturer
003 161
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
003 073
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9

Note:
This setting visible only if an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Octet address ASDU
Note:
The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c t e t a d d r e s s A S D U was
ILSA: Device address.
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable
003 177
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
Note:
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig.
003 179
Fig: 3-7,3-8,
3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication

interface 1.
7-9
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
003 074
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
003 175
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
003 050
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the

communication interface.
Note:
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel.

telegram via the communication interface.
Note:
COMM1: Delta V
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note:
COMM1: Delta I
003 051
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

Note:
COMM1: Delta f
003 052
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
Note:
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
003 150
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
003 053
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9

Note:
COMM1: Delta t
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time-delay has elapsed provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
Note:
7-10
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Contin. general scan
003 077
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P63x transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The
time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
Note:
COMM1: Comm. address length

Setting for the communication address length.
Note:
Fig. 3-8
This setting visible only if the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr.

Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
Note:
003 201
003 200
Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Cause transm. length

Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
003 192
Fig. 3-8
Note:
003 193 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Address length ASDU
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
003 194 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj.
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
003 196
Fig. 3-8
Note:
003 197 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
Note:
7-11
7 Settings
(continued)
003 195 Fig. 3-8

COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
Note:
003 198 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Time tag length
Setting for the time tag length.
Note:
003 190 Fig. 3-8

COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as
a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
003 191
Fig. 3-8
003 199
Fig. 3-8
Note:
COMM1: Initializ. signal
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
Note:
003 226 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Balanced operation
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced
basis (full duplex operation).
Note:
003 227 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Direction bit
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note:
003 228 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Time-out interval
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
Note:
7-12
7 Settings
(continued)
003 210 Fig. 3-10

COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the
selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second
to the register no. 00302, etc.
Note:
003 211 Fig. 3-10

COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig.
selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the
register no. 10302, etc.
Note:
003 212 Fig. 3-10

COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
Note:
003 213 Fig. 3-10

COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param.
selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second
to the register no. 40302, etc.
Note:
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS)

All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
Note:
003 152
Fig. 3-10
003 249 Fig. 3-10

COMM1: Autom.event confirm.
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in
order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
Note:
003 241 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
Note:
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout

Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
Note:
003 242
Fig. 3-11
7-13
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode

Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
Note:
003 243
Fig. 3-11
003 244 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
Note:
003 245 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Link Max. Retries
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
Note:
003 246 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
Note:
003 247 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del.
Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization
from the master.
Note:
003 232 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
003 233 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs.
Note:
003 235 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp.
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note:
7-14
7 Settings
(continued)
003 236 Fig. 3-11

COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs.
Note:
003 250 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values
in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
deadband'.
Note:
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3)

Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
Note:
Fig. 3-11
103 042
Fig. 3-12
103 043
Fig. 3-12
COMM1: Command selection

Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol.
Note:
This setting visible only if the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal selection
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note:
003 248
103 044 Fig. 3-12

COMM1: Meas. val. selection
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note:
COMM1: Parameter selection

Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note:
103 045
Fig. 3-12
103 046 Fig. 3-12

COMM1: Delta t (COURIER)
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
Note:
7-15
7 Settings
(continued)
056 057
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
103 170 Fig. 3-14
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.

Setting for the line idle state indication.
103 165
Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Baud rate

Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM2: Parity bit
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P63x.
103 071
Fig. 3-14
103 171
Fig. 3-14
103 176 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Dead time monitoring
The P63x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note:
This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
103 202 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Mon. time polling
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
103 203
COMM2: Positive ackn. fault
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively
after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
103 072 Fig. 3-14
103 161
Fig. 3-14
Note:
103 073 Fig. 3-14
103 177 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
103 179 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig.
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 2.
7-16
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
103 074
Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel.

telegram via the communication interface.
103 175
Fig. 3-14
103 050 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Delta V
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
103 051 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Delta I
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
103 052 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Delta f
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel

103 150
Fig. 3-14
103 053 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Delta t
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time-delay has elapsed provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
7-17
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Function group IEC

Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the
IEC: General enable USER
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
056 059
104 000
104 058
IEC: Enable configuration
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain
consistency among all the parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and
GOOSE, they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this
command is sent to the device, the actual state of the previously changed
setting parameter of the three function groups is enabled in the
communication data model of the connected device. This function is carried
out automatically with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.
104 050
IEC: Inactivity timer
Additional communication monitor at Ethernet. Should a logged-on client
issue no further request message after this time-delay has elapsed, this
client will automatically be logged-off, i.e. no further reports will be issued to
him. To re-establish communication the client is required to perform a new
log-on procedure with the device (IED).
104 056
IEC: Ethernet media
Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from
either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering
option) connection.
104 057
IEC: IED name
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system; it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
104 001
IEC: IP address
IP address for the device (IED has server function).
Note:
In the S&R 103 support software, the complete IP address is displayed
here. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address
distributed to the following four data model addresses:
IEC: I P a d d r e s s , I E C : IP Address 1,
IEC: IP address 2, IEC: IP address 3
(104 001, 104 002, 104 003, 104 004).
104 005
IEC: Subnet mask
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
distributed to four data model addresses.
7-18
7 Settings
(continued)
104 010
IEC: Number of routes
Number of network routes that can be contacted outside of the sub-network,
between the device (IED) and a client or server, communicating with this
device, and situated in an exterior target network.
Such a configuration is required only then when this device must contact an
external client/server direct without having its own network router to convert
an IP address.
Addressing of the router and the target network however are always
necessary.
Up to four such external target networks can be contacted.
IEC: Router address 1
IP address of network router # 1, 2, 3 or 4.
104 011
104 019
104 027
104 035
Note:
distributed to each of the four data model addresses.
IEC: Target network 1
IP address of target network # 1, 2, 3 or 4.
104 015
104 023
104 031
104 039
Note:
104 200
IEC: SNTP operating mode
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to
Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
104 201
IEC: SNTP poll cycle time
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode
is set to Request from Server.
104 202
IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP.
104 210
IEC: SNTP Server 2 IP.
IP address of synchronizing clock server 1 or 2.
Note:
7-19
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Diff. local time

Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
104 206
104 207
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.
104 051
IEC: Deadband value
Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control
Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change
occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value,
the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter
value is calculated according to this formula:
Step size measured value setting IEC: Deadband value
104 060
IEC: Update cycle energy
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB).
No RCB transmission with setting to blocked!
7-20
7 Settings
(continued)

Substation Event
056 068
GOOSE: Function group GOOSE
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General enable USER

Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
106 001
106 003 Fig. 3-16

GOOSE: Multic. MAC address
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving
clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
106 004
Fig. 3-16
106 002 Fig. 3-16

GOOSE: Goose ID
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
106 006 Fig. 3-16
GOOSE: VLAN Identifier
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority

VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
GOOSE: DataSet Reference
DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
106 007
Fig. 3-16
106 008
Fig. 3-16
106 009 Fig. 3-16

GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision
Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is
sent from this device (IED).
7-21
7 Settings
(continued)
106 011
106 013
106 015
106 017
106 019
106 021
106 023
106 025
106 027
106 029
106 031
106 033
106 035
106 037
106 039
106 041
106 043
106 045
106 047
106 049
106 051
106 053
106 055
106 057
106 059
106 061
106 063
106 065
106 067
106 069
106 071
106 073
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE
outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.
7-22
7 Settings
(continued)
107 000
GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID
107 010
107 020
107 030
107 040
107 050
107 060
107 070
107 080
107 090
107 100
107 110
107 120
107 130
107 140
107 150
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for
the virtual binary GOOSE input.
107 001
GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID
107 011
107 021
107 031
107 041
107 051
107 061
107 071
107 081
107 091
107 101
107 111
107 121
107 131
107 141
107 151
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.
7-23
7 Settings
(continued)
107 002
GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref
107 012
107 022
107 032
107 042
107 052
107 062
107 072
107 082
107 092
107 102
107 112
107 122
107 132
107 142
107 152
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)
for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a
chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device
(IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data
object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then
only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
107 003
GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind
107 013
107 023
107 033
107 043
107 053
107 063
107 073
107 083
107 093
107 103
107 113
107 123
107 133
107 143
107 153
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this
device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
7-24
7 Settings
(continued)
107 004
GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind
107 014
107 024
107 034
107 044
107 054
107 064
107 074
107 084
107 094
107 104
107 114
107 124
107 134
107 144
107 154
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this
device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
107 005
GOOSE: Input 1 default
107 015
107 025
107 035
107 045
107 055
107 065
107 075
107 085
107 095
107 105
107 115
107 125
107 135
107 145
107 155
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-25
7 Settings
(continued)
107 006
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
107 016
107 026
107 036
107 046
107 056
107 066
107 076
107 086
107 096
107 106
107 116
107 126
107 136
107 146
107 156
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical
state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE
7-26
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation

Status Events
056 060
GSSE: Function group GSSE
Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters in this function group are
active only if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General enable USER

Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.
104 049
104 052
GSSE: Min. cycle
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]

The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
104 053
GSSE: Max. cycle
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated
value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max.
value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
104 054
GSSE: Increment
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.
104 055
GSSE: Operating mode
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC
address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
7-27
7 Settings
(continued)
104 101
GSSE: Output 1 bit pair
104 104
104 107
104 110
104 113
104 116
104 119
104 122
104 125
104 128
104 131
104 134
104 137
104 140
104 143
104 146
104 149
104 152
104 155
104 158
104 161
104 164
104 167
104 170
104 173
104 176
104 179
104 182
104 185
104 188
104 191
104 194
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
7-28
7 Settings
(continued)
104 102
GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
104 105
104 108
104 111
104 114
104 117
104 120
104 123
104 126
104 129
104 132
104 135
104 138
104 141
104 144
104 147
104 150
104 153
104 156
104 159
104 162
104 165
104 168
104 171
104 174
104 177
104 180
104 183
104 186
104 189
104 192
104 195
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE
outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.
7-29
7 Settings
(continued)
105 001
GSSE: Input 1 bit pair
105 006
105 011
105 016
105 021
105 026
105 031
105 036
105 041
105 046
105 051
105 056
105 061
105 066
105 071
105 076
105 081
105 086
105 091
105 096
105 101
105 106
105 111
105 116
105 121
105 126
105 131
105 136
105 141
105 146
105 151
105 156
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input.
A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of
which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
7-30
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 IED name

IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
105 002
105 007
105 012
105 017
105 022
105 027
105 032
105 037
105 042
105 047
105 052
105 057
105 062
105 067
105 072
105 077
105 082
105 087
105 092
105 097
105 102
105 107
105 112
105 117
105 122
105 127
105 132
105 137
105 142
105 147
105 152
105 157
7-31
7 Settings
(continued)
105 003
GSSE: Input 1 default
105 008
105 013
105 018
105 023
105 028
105 033
105 038
105 043
105 048
105 053
105 058
105 063
105 068
105 073
105 078
105 083
105 088
105 093
105 098
105 103
105 108
105 113
105 118
105 123
105 128
105 133
105 138
105 143
105 148
105 153
105 158
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-32
7 Settings
(continued)
105 004
GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
105 009
105 014
105 019
105 024
105 029
105 034
105 039
105 044
105 049
105 054
105 059
105 064
105 069
105 074
105 079
105 084
105 089
105 094
105 099
105 104
105 109
105 114
105 119
105 124
105 129
105 134
105 139
105 144
105 149
105 154
105 159
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state
signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE
IRIG-B interface
056 072
IRIGB: Function group IRIGB
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
IRIGB: General enable USER

Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
023 200
Fig. 3-17
7-33
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input
The P63x has opto-coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The number and connection schemes for the available binary signal inputs are shown in
the terminal connection diagrams. The configuration options for all binary inputs can be
displayed in the support software.
The P63x identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this
slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are
automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active high mode) or absence (active low mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal.
7-34
7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Fct. assignm. U 1201

Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
152 199
152 202
152 205
152 208
190 002
190 006
190 010
190 014
190 018
190 022
190 026
190 030
190 034
190 038
190 042
190 046
190 050
190 054
190 058
190 062
190 066
190 070
190 074
190 078
190 082
190 086
190 090
190 094
192 002
192 006
192 010
192 014
192 018
192 022
153 087
153 090
153 093
153 096
7-35
7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Oper. mode U 1201

Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
7-36
152 200
152 203
152 206
152 209
190 003
190 007
190 011
190 015
190 019
190 023
190 027
190 031
190 035
190 039
190 043
190 047
190 051
190 055
190 059
190 063
190 067
190 071
190 075
190 079
190 083
190 087
190 091
190 095
192 003
192 007
192 011
192 015
192 019
192 023
153 088
153 091
153 094
153 097
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Input
056 030
MEASI: Function group MEASI
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the
011 100 Fig. 3-19
MEASI: General enable USER
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
MEASI: Enable IDC p.u.
037 190
Fig: 3-21,
3-22
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P63x to
display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
037 191 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC< open circuit
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P63x will issue an open
circuit signal.
MEASI: IDC 1
037 150
Fig: 3-20,
3-21,3-22
Fig. 3-22
037 152
MEASI: IDC 2
037 154 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 3
037 156 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 4
037 158 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 5
037 160 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 6
037 162 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 7
037 164 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 8
037 166 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 9
037 168 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 10
037 170 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 11
037 172 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 12
037 174 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 13
037 176 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 14
037 178 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 15
037 180 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 16
037 182 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 17
037 184 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 18
037 186 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 19
037 188 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC 20
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.
7-37
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1
037 151
Fig: 3-20,
3-21,3-22
Fig. 3-22
037 153
MEASI: IDC,lin 2
037 155 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 3
037 157 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 4
037 159 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 5
037 161 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 6
037 163 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 7
037 165 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 8
037 167 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 9
037 169 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 10
037 171 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 11
037 173 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 12
037 175 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 13
037 177 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 14
037 179 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 15
037 181 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 16
037 183 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 17
037 185 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 18
037 187 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 19
037 189 Fig. 3-22
MEASI: IDC,lin 20
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1

Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
7-38
037 192
Fig. 3-23
037 193
Fig. 3-23
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The configuration options for all binary outputs can be displayed in the support software.
The P63x identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden
in the menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned simultaneously to
several output relays for the purpose of contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For
output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be cancelled.
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1201
Assignment of functions to output relays.
151 009
151 012
171 002
171 006
171 010
171 014
171 018
171 022
171 026
171 030
173 002
173 006
173 010
173 014
173 018
173 022
151 201
151 204
151 207
151 210
151 213
151 216
151 219
151 222
7-39
7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: Oper. mode K 1201

Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-40
151 010
151 013
171 003
171 007
171 011
171 015
171 019
171 023
171 027
171 031
173 003
173 007
173 011
173 015
173 019
173 023
151 202
151 205
151 208
151 211
151 214
151 217
151 220
151 223
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Output
056 020
MEASO: Function group MEASO
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
MEASO: General enable USER

Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
031 074
Fig. 3-27
053 002 Fig. 3-30

MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
010 010 Fig. 3-30
MEASO: Hold time output BCD
Setting for thetransmission time of the selected measured value in BCD
form.
016 082 Fig. 3-30
MEASO: Scale BCD
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula:
M
Scaling factor = x,max
M x,scal
where:
Mx,scal :
scaled measured value
Mx,max :
maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value

Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
053 000
Fig. 3-32
053 001
010 114 Fig. 3-32

010 115
Setting for the time-delay for output of the selected measured value.
037 104 Fig. 3-32
037 110
Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to
be set is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,min
M x,scal,min =
M x,RL
where:
Mx,min :
minimum transmitted value for the selected measured value
M x,RL :
range limit value of the selected measured value
7-41
7 Settings
(continued)
037 105 Fig. 3-32

037 111
Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point
of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the
following formula:
M x,knee
M x,scal,knee =
M x,RL
where:
M x,knee :
knee point value to be transmitted for the selected
M x,RL :
measured value
range limit value of the selected measured value
037 106 Fig. 3-32

037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax
(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measured values
Range
Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2

Associated scaled measured values
0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued
Range
Measured values to be issued
Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max

Designation of the set values
in the data model
"Scaled min. val. Ax" ...

... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Knee point for characteristic
Designation
Value for knee point
Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value
Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value

in the data model
"Scaled knee val. Ax"
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
7-42
7 Settings
(continued)

Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller
than or equal to the minimum measured value to be transmitted.
037 107
Fig. 3-32
037 113
037 108 Fig. 3-32

037 114
Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the
knee point of the characteristic.

037 109
Fig. 3-32
037 115
Display values
Designation in the data model
Output current range

for measured values in the range
"measured values to be issued"
"AnOut min. val. Ax" ...

... "AnOut max. val. Ax"
Output current to be set

for measured values = Mx,min.
"AnOut min. val. Ax"

for measured values = Mx,max.
"AnOut max. val. Ax"

for measured values = Mx,knee
"AnOut knee point Ax"
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
MEASO: Output value 1
037 120
037 121
037 122
Fig: 3-30,
3-32
Fig: 3-30,
3-32
Fig: 3-30,
3-32
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.
7-43
7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P63x has a total of 17 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals.
The configuration options for all LED indicators can be displayed in the support software.
LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY" and signals the
operational readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2
and H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF SERVICE" and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE".
The factory setting for LED indicator H 4 is shown in the terminal connection drawings
included in the documentation or the appendix.
The layout of the LED indicators is shown in the dimensional drawings in chapter 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode
('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and
in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
7-44
7 Settings
(continued)
LED: Fct. assignm. H 2

Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y function is permanently assigned.
085 001
Fig. 3-33

Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3.
The S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned.
085 004
Fig. 3-33

Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
085 007
Fig. 3-33
LED: Operating mode H 2

Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
085 002
085 010
085 013
085 016
085 019
085 022
085 025
085 028
085 031
085 034
085 037
085 040
085 043
085 005
085 008
085 011
085 014
085 017
085 020
085 023
085 026
085 029
085 032
085 035
085 038
085 041
085 044
7-45
7 Settings
(continued)
Main function
MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication
channels.
003 169
Fig. 3-61
103 210 Page: 3-91

MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
103 211 Page: 3-91
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AIN : Ti me s ync . ti me -ou t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out

Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary
source.
Fault Recording
7-46
103 212
Page: 3-91
035 160 Fig.*: 3-78

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1
035 161
035 162
035 163
035 164
035 165
035 166
035 167
035 168
035 169
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.10
035 170
035 171
035 172
035 173
035 174
035 175
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
The figure shown illustrates an overview of the assignment.
7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling protection
functions
By means of a configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device functions flexibly
to the scope of protection functions required in each particular h.v. system.
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.
None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or
an LED indicator.
None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is

defined by the function group designation (example:
DIFF: Function group DIFF

Cancelling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration.If the
056 027
056 037
Ground differential protection REF_1: Function group REF_1
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection) REF_2: Function group REF_2
056 038
056 039
REF_3: Function group REF_3
Cancelling function groups REF_1 to REF_3 or including them in the
configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Note:
Ground differential protection is not available with the P631.
Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
Definite-time overcurrent
protection
056 031
DTOC1: Function group DTOC1
056 032
DTOC2: Function group DTOC2:
056 053
DTOC3: Function group DTOC3
Cancelling function groups DTOC1 to DTOC3 or including them in the
Note:
Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
7-47
7 Settings
(continued)
Protection
056 051
IDMT1: Function group IDMT1
056 061
056 071
Cancelling function groups IDMT1 to IDMT3 or including them in the
Note:
Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
056 054
Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Function group THRM1
056 055
THRM2: Function group THRM2
Cancelling function groups THR_1 to THRM_2 or including them in the
configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Note:
Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.
V<>: Function group V<>

Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
056 010
Note:
Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631.
Frequency Protection
f<>: Function group f<>

Cancelling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the
056 033
Note:
Frequency protection is not available with the P631.
V/f: Function group V/f

Cancelling function group V/f or including it in the configuration. If the
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
056 056
Current Transformer
Supervision
CTS: Function group CTS
056 077
Cancelling function group CTS or including it in the configuration. If the

Note:
7-48
The new processor board with a DSP coprocessor is an

unconditional hardware requirement for this function group!
7 Settings
(continued)
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: Function group MCM_1
056 073
056 074
MCM_2: Function group MCM_2
056 075
056 076
Cancelling function groups MCM_1 to MCM_4 or including them in the
configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this
setting.
Note:
Function group MCM_4 is available with the P634 only. Function

group MCM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634.
056 025
LIMIT: Function group LIMIT
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
056 042
Limit Value Monitoring, 1 to 3 LIM_1: Function group LIM_1
056 043
LIM_2: Function group LIM_2
056 050
LIM_3: Function group LIM_3
Cancelling function groups LIM_1 to LIM_3 or including them in the
Note:
Logic
Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the

P634 only.
056 017
LOGIC: Function group LOGIC
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the
7-49
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3
7.1.3.1
PC link
Function Parameters
Global
003 182 Fig. 3-5

PC: Command blocking
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC
interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
003 086
Fig. 3-5
003 172 Fig. 3-6

COMM1: Command block. USER
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from
communication interface 1.
003 076 Fig: 3-7,
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
3-8,3-9
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
103 172 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Command block. USER
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from
communication interface 2.
103 076 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary outputs
OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER

When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
021 014
Fig. 3-25
Main function
MAIN: Protection enabled
003 030
Fig: 3-26,
3-50, 3-54
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be

changed when protection is disabled.
003 012 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Test mode USER
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom
010 030
Fig: 3-131, 3133
010 049
Fig: 3-83,
3-84, 3-102,
3-113, 3-142,
3-148
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.

MAIN: Phase sequence
Setting for the phase sequence: A-B-C or A-C-B.(Alternative terminology:

Setting for the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise.)
7-50
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a
019 020
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b
019 021
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end c
019 022
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end d
019 026
Fig: 3-41,
3-80, 3-94
Fig: 3-41,
3-80
Fig: 3-41,
3-80
Fig: 3-41,
3-80
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer
(phase currents) of end a or b .
MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
019 027
Fig: 3-42,
3-80
Fig. 3-42
019 028
MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end b
019 029 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end c
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at
the neutral-point-to-ground connection.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim.

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer.
010 002
Fig. 3-45
MAIN: Inom device, end a
010 024
MAIN: Inom device, end b
010 025
MAIN: Inom device, end c
010 029
MAIN: Inom device, end d

Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents of ends a,b, c and d. This also
corresponds to the nominal device current.
010 047
Fig: 3-35,
3-36a
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-36b
MAIN: IY,nom device, end a
010 142
MAIN: IY,nom device, end b
010 143
MAIN: IY,nom device, end c
010 144
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec.
010 009
Fig: 3-35,
3-36a
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-35,
3-45
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
voltage measurement.
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,a
010 140
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,b
010 150
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,c
010 160
010 170
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,d
The vectorial sum of the phase currents of end a to d is governed by the
connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in
Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard'. If the connection direction is
reversed then the setting must be 'Opposite'. Instead of accounting for
connection reversal applied to one end in the settings for DIFF: Vector grp.
ends z1-z2 (where z1-z2 stands for a-b, a-c or a-d), it is possible to account
for it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits.
Fig: 3-35,
3-36a
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-36b
7-51
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,a
010 141
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,b
010 151
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,c
010 161
Fig: 3-35,
3-36a
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
Fig: 3-35,
3-36b
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be

'Standard'. If the connection direction is reversed then the setting must be
'Opposite'.
011 030 Fig: 3-41,
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP
3-44
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the phase currents to be displayed.
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ipos
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN
011 048
Page: 3-74
011 058
Page: 3-74
011 031
Fig: 3-42,
3-43,3-44
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IY

measured operating value of the current in the neutral-point-to-ground
connection to be displayed.
011 036
Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V

Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the voltage to be displayed.
011 032
Fig. 3-45
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del
010 113
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
measured operating value of the residual current to be displayed.
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
021 021 Fig. 3-52
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1
(M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
021 022 Fig. 3-52
021 048 Fig. 3-52
021 049 Fig. 3-52
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER

Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
7-52
021 012
Fig. 3-57
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1

Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
021 001
Fig. 3-57

021 002
Fig. 3-57

021 046
Fig. 3-57
021 047
Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
021 003
Fig. 3-57

021 004
Fig. 3-57
021 032
Fig. 3-57

021 033
Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1

Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.
021 023
Fig. 3-57
021 024
Fig. 3-57

021 025
Fig. 3-57
021 026
Fig. 3-57
021 031 Fig. 3-54

MAIN: Fct. assign. fault
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty. The device is
blocked in both cases.
003 100 Fig. 3-63
Selecting a parameter subset PSS: Control via USER
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local
control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER

Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
003 060
Fig. 3-63
003 063 Fig. 3-63

PSS: Keep time
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time-delay has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.
7-53
7 Settings
(continued)
Self-Monitoring
021 030 Fig. 3-64

SFMON: Fct. assign. warning
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals
'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED
indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading
to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the
above signals and indication.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention

This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the
monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.
Fault Recording
021 018
Page: 3-99
003 085 Fig. 3-76

FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger
This setting defines the signals that will trigger disturbance recording and
fault data acquisition.
016 018 Fig. 3-76
FT_RC: Id>
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
016 019 Fig. 3-76
FT_RC: IR>
This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
003 078 Fig. 3-78
FT_RC: Pre-fault time
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs
(pre-fault recording time).
003 079 Fig. 3-78
FT_RC: Post-fault time
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
003 075 Fig. 3-78
FT_RC: Max. recording time
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
7-54
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2
Main function
General Functions
MAIN: Vnom prim., end a
019 017
Fig: 3-80,
3-94
MAIN: Vnom prim., end b

Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end b of the transformer.
019 018
Fig. 3-80
MAIN: Vnom prim., end c

Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end c of the transformer.
MAIN: Vnom prim., end d
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end d of the transformer.
019 019
Fig. 3-80
019 037
Fig. 3-80
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end a of the transformer.
016 096 Fig. 3-38

MAIN: Evaluation IN, end a
This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual
current: either the calculated residual current derived from the sum of the
phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer.
016 097 Fig. 3-38
MAIN: Evaluation IN, end b
016 098 Fig. 3-38
MAIN: Evaluation IN, end c
019 099 Fig. 3-39
MAIN: Current summation
For two ends of the transformer, the currents for each phase and the
residual currents can be combined. This setting specifies the transformer
ends to be involved.
Note:
This setting is available for the P633 and the P634 only.
018 009 Fig. 3-51

MAIN: Hold time dyn.param.
Setting for the hold time of the dynamic parameters. During this period,
the dynamic thresholds are active in place of the normal thresholds.
DIFF: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the differential protection function.
DIFF: Reference power Sref
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power.
019 080
Fig. 3-79
019 016
Fig. 3-80
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,a

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end a.
019 023
Fig. 3-80
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,b

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end b.
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,c
Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end c.
019 024
Fig. 3-80
019 025
Fig. 3-80
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,d

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end d.
019 038
Fig. 3-80
7-55
7 Settings
(continued)
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,a
004 105
Fig: 3-80,
3-81
004 106
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,b
004 127
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,c
004 168
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,d
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for end a, b, c or d.
011 037 Fig. 3-92
DIFF: Meas. value rel. Id
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order
for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data.
011 038 Fig. 3-92
DIFF: Meas. value rel. IR
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order
for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
Ground differential protection REF_1: General enable USER

(Br: Restricted earth fault protection) REF_2: General enable USER
REF_3: General enable USER
Disabling or enabling ground fault differential protection.
Note:
019 050
Fig. 3-93
019 150
019 250
Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the

P634 only.
019 100
REF_1: Select. meas. input
019 101
019 102
Display of the measuring input that provides the measured values evaluated
by the ground differential protection function.
019 031 Fig. 3-94
REF_1: Reference power Sref
019 032
019 033
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for
the relevant transformer end.
019 034 Fig. 3-94
REF_1: Ref. current Iref
019 035
019 036
Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x.
004 160 Fig. 3-94
REF_1: Matching fact. kam,N
004 161
004 162
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the vector sum of
the phase currents.
004 163 Fig. 3-94
REF_1: Matching fact. kam,Y
004 164
004 165
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the neutral-point
current.
7-56
7 Settings
(continued)
011 039 Fig. 3-98

REF_1: Meas. value rel. Id
011 044
011 045
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order
for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data.
011 040 Fig. 3-98
REF_1: Meas. value rel. IR
011 046
011 047
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order
for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
protection
DTOC1: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
031 135
Fig. 3-100
031 136
031 139
Note:
Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634
only.
019 103 Fig. 3-99
DTOC1: Select. meas. input
019 104
019 105
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured values
monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Protection
IDMT1: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Note:
only.
Fig. 3-107
031 142
031 143
Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634
IDMT1: Select. meas. input

Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured values
monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: General enable USER
THRM2: General enable USER
Enabling or disabling the thermal overload protection function.
Note:
only.
031 141
019 106
Fig. 3-106
019 116
019 126
031 144
Fig. 3-119
031 145
Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634
019 109 Fig. 3-118

THRM1: Select. meas. input
019 110
THRM2: Select. meas. input
Selection of the current relevant for thermal overload protection. Select from
the currents measured at the measuring input for end a, b, c, d. For the
P633 and the P634, there is an additional option, namely the selection of
the value obtained according to the setting at M AIN : Cu rren t
s u mm a ti on .
7-57
7 Settings
(continued)
THRM1: Operating mode

THRM2: Operating mode
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection.
039 121
Fig. 3-123
039 181
004 152
THRM1: O/T f.Iref persist 1
004 172
THRM2: O/T f.Iref persist 2
Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible
temperatures of the protected object and the coolant.
V<>: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the time-voltage protection function.
Note:
023 030
Fig. 3-125
023 031
Fig. 3-128
Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631.
f<>: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the over-/underfrequency protection function.
Note:
Frequency protection is not available with the P631.
018 201 Fig. 3-129
f<>: Evaluation time
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
018 200 Fig. 3-129
f<>: Undervolt. block. V<
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below
this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
V/f: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the Overfluxing protection function.
019 097
Fig. 3-132
Current Transformer
Supervision
CTS: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the current transformer supervision function.
031 085
Fig. 3-140
031 146
Fig. 3-147
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: General enable USER

MCM_2: General enable USER
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
MCM_1: Select. meas. input
Assigning measuring-circuit monitoring functions to ends a, b, c and d.
7-58
031 147
031 148
031 149
031 150
031 151
031 152
031 153
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function.
014 010
Fig. 3-150
LIMIT: IDC,lin>
Setting for operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>>
Setting for operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
014 110
Fig. 3-150
014 111
Fig. 3-150
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>>
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
014 112
Fig. 3-150
014 113
Fig. 3-150
LIMIT: IDC,lin<
Setting for operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<<
Setting for operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
014 114
Fig. 3-150
014 115
Fig. 3-150
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<<
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
014 116
Fig. 3-150
014 117
Fig. 3-150
LIMIT: T>
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
LIMIT: T>>
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
014 100
Fig. 3-151
014 101
Fig. 3-151
LIMIT: tT>
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
014 103
Fig. 3-151
LIMIT: tT>>
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
LIMIT: T<
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
014 104
Fig. 3-151
014 105
Fig. 3-151
LIMIT: T<<
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
014 106
Fig. 3-151
LIMIT: tT<
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
LIMIT: tT<<
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
014 107
Fig. 3-151
014 108
Fig. 3-151
7-59
7 Settings
(continued)

1 to 3
LIM_1: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function.
Note:
7-60
014 014
Fig. 3-153
014 015
014 017
Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the

P634 only.
LIM_1: Select. meas. input

Selecting a measuring input for limit value monitoring of the measured
values.
LIM_1: I>
LIM_2: I>
LIM_3: I>
Setting for the operate value of I>.
019 111
LIM_1: I>>
LIM_2: I>>
LIM_3: I>>
Setting for the operate value of I>>.
015 117
LIM_1: tI>>
LIM_2: tI>>
LIM_3: tI>>
Setting for the operate delay of I>>.
015 121
LIM_1: tI>
LIM_2: tI>
LIM_3: tI>
Setting for the operate delay of I>.
015 120
LIM_1: I<
LIM_2: I<
LIM_3: I<
Setting for the operate value of I<.
LIM_1: tI<
LIM_2: tI<
LIM_3: tI<
Setting for the operate delay of I<.
015 118
LIM_1: I<<
LIM_2: I<<
LIM_3: I<<
Setting for the operate value of I<<.
015 119
LIM_1: tI<<
LIM_2: tI<<
LIM_3: tI<<
Setting for the operate delay of I<<.
015 123
Fig. 3-152
019 112
019 113
015 116
Fig. 3-153
016 116
017 114
Fig. 3-153
016 117
017 117
Fig. 3-153
016 121
017 121
Fig. 3-153
016 120
017 120
Fig. 3-153
016 118
017 118
015 122
Fig. 3-153
016 122
017 122
Fig. 3-153
016 119
017 119
Fig. 3-153
016 123
017 123
7 Settings
(continued)
Logic
LOGIC: General enable USER

Enabling or disabling the logic function.
031 099
Fig. 3-155
LOGIC: Set 1 USER
034 030
LOGIC: Set 2 USER

LOGIC: Set 3 USER
LOGIC: Set 4 USER
LOGIC: Set 5 USER
LOGIC: Set 6 USER
LOGIC: Set 7 USER
LOGIC: Set 8 USER
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
Fig: 3-154,
3-155
034 031
034 037
Fig. 3-155
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
030 000
Fig. 3-155
034 032
034 033
034 034
034 035
034 036
030 004
030 008
030 012
030 016
030 020
030 024
030 028
030 032
030 036
030 040
030 044
030 048
030 052
030 056
030 060
030 064
030 068
030 072
030 076
030 080
030 084
030 088
030 092
030 096
031 000
031 004
031 008
031 012
031 016
031 020
031 024
7-61
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1

These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
7-62
030 001
Fig. 3-155
030 005
030 009
030 013
030 017
030 021
030 025
030 029
030 033
030 037
030 041
030 045
030 049
030 053
030 057
030 061
030 065
030 069
030 073
030 077
030 081
030 085
030 089
030 093
030 097
031 001
031 005
031 009
031 013
031 017
031 021
031 025
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1

Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
030 002
Fig. 3-155
030 006
030 010
030 014
030 018
030 022
030 026
030 030
030 034
030 038
030 042
030 046
030 050
030 054
030 058
030 062
030 066
030 070
030 074
030 078
030 082
030 086
030 090
030 094
030 098
031 002
031 006
031 010
031 014
031 018
031 022
031 026
7-63
7 Settings
(continued)

Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note:
7-64
030 003
Fig. 3-155
030 007
030 011
030 015
030 019
030 023
030 027
030 031
030 035
030 039
030 043
030 047
030 051
030 055
030 059
030 063
030 067
030 071
030 075
030 079
030 083
030 087
030 091
030 095
030 099
031 003
031 007
031 011
031 015
031 019
031 023
031 027
This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
7 Settings
(continued)
044 000 Fig. 3-161

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1
044 002
044 004
044 006
044 008
044 010
044 012
044 014
044 016
044 018
044 020
044 022
044 024
044 026
044 028
044 030
044 032
044 034
044 036
044 038
044 040
044 042
044 044
044 046
044 048
044 050
044 052
044 054
044 056
044 058
044 060
044 062
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-65
7 Settings
(continued)
044 001 Fig. 3-161

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
044 003
044 005
044 007
044 009
044 011
044 013
044 015
044 017
044 019
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t)
044 021
044 023
044 025
044 027
044 029
044 031
044 033
044 035
044 037
044 039
044 041
044 043
044 045
044 047
044 049
044 051
044 053
044 055
044 057
044 059
044 061
044 063
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-66
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3
Main function
Parameter Subsets
010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203

MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx
010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207
MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx
010 208 010 209 010 210 010 211
MAIN: Phase reversal c PSx
010 212 010 213 010 214 010 215
MAIN: Phase reversal d PSx
Setting for the phase reversal function (see description for function group
MAIN) for electrical machines in pumped storage power stations.
Phases to be reversed (A-B swapped, B-C swapped or C-A swapped) may
be set separately for ends a, b, c and d.
At the same time the display M AIN : Phas e re versa l ac ti ve will be
triggered unless the setting is No swap.
Fig. 3-37
072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152

DIFF: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset (setting group) in which
differential protection is enabled.
Fig. 3-79
019 010 019 040 019 041 019 042

DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx
019 011 019 043 019 044 019 045
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-c PSx
019 014 019 046 019 047 019 048
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-d PSx
For standard connection of the P63x (see Chapter 5), the vector group ID
needs to be entered. For connection reversal applied to one individual end,
this can be taken into account in setting (M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c .
I P , x ). The following algorithms apply:
Fig. 3-83
Fig. 3-37
Fig. 3-37
Fig. 3-37
Fig. 3-83
Fig. 3-84
Setting = ID + 6
If the addition results in a value > 12 then:
Setting = (ID + 6) 12
If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged and if
this is not accounted for by the settings at M AIN : C on n .m eas ,c irc .
IP,z (where z is end a,b,c or d) a nd M AIN : C onn .me as,c irc . IY,z
(where z is end a,b or c) then the algorithm is:
Setting = 12 ID
If an A-C-B phase sequence (or "anti-clockwise rotating field") is present
then this should be entered as a setting at the P63x. In this case, the P63x
will automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID
to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 set ID).
For application of the P63x as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or
6 depending on the current transformer connection.
072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142
DIFF: Idiff>
PSx
Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the
reference current of the relevant transformer end.
Fig. 3-88
7-67
7 Settings
(continued)
072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143

DIFF: Idiff>>
PSx
Threshold value of the differential current which will disable the inrush
stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint.
Note:
If the threshold is set too high, the P63x might not trip in the presence of
internal faults with transformer saturation.
072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144
DIFF: Idiff>>>
PSx
This setting defines the threshold value for the differential current where the
differential protection is triggered regardless of restraining quantity, inrush
stabilization and saturation discriminator.
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-88
Note:
If the threshold is set too low, the P63x can trip in the presence of external
faults with transformer saturation.
DIFF: Idiff>(CTS)
PSx
080 000 081 000 082 000 083 000
Fig: 3-88,
3-86
If the Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) function has detected a CT

failure, then the basic operating threshold D IFF : Id iff> can be raised to a
settable safe value D IF F : Id i ff> (C TS) . Please refer to the CTS function
section for more details.
7-68
072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145

DIFF: m1
PSx
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range
0.5 Idiff >< IR IR,m2 .
Fig. 3-88
072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146

DIFF: m2
PSx
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range
IR > IR,m2
.
Fig. 3-88
072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147

DIFF: IR,m2
PSx
Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m2.
072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148
DIFF: Op.mode rush rst.PSx
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.
For application of the P63x as machine protection, harmonic restraint can
be disabled by way of this setting. For application of the P63x as
transformer protection, the user can select whether the harmonic restraint
should operate in cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring
system.
Fig. 3-88
072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159

DIFF: RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
Operate value of the inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) of differential
protection as a ratio of the second harmonic with the fundamental
component of the differential current, in percent.
Fig. 3-89
072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155

DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding a.
Fig. 3-83
072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156

DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx
Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding b.
072 157 073 157 074 157 075 157
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.c en.PSx
Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding c.
Fig. 3-83
072 154 073 154 074 154 075 154

DIFF: 0-seq. filt.d en.PSx
Enabling or disabling zero-sequence filtering for winding d.
Fig. 3-84
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-83
7 Settings
(continued)
072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158

DIFF: Overflux.bl. en. PSx
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint function.
Fig. 3-91
072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160

DIFF: Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx
Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of
the fifth harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential
current, in percent.
Fig. 3-91
010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165

DIFF: Op.del.,trip sig.PSx
The time-delay of the differential protection trip signal can be set here.
Fig. 3-88
072 006 073 006 074 006 075 006

DIFF: Hyst. effective PSx
The hysteresis of the pick-up characteristics may be disabled or enabled.
072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141
Ground differential protection REF_1: Enable
PSx
(Br: Restricted earth fault protection) REF_2: Enable
072 161 073 161 074 161 075 161
PSx
072 031 073 031 074 031 075 031
REF_3: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground differential
protection is enabled.
072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149
REF_1: Operating mode PSx
072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169
072 049 073 049 074 049 075 049
As of version P63x -603, 3 operating modes can be selected. The 'Low
imped. / sum(IP)' operating mode is the existing low impedance ground
differential protection mode from version P63x 602. The alternative
selectable modes are 'Low imped. / IP,max' and 'High impedance'.
Fig. 3-93
080 003 081 003 082 003 083 003

REF_1: CTS effective PSx
080 004 081 004 082 004 083 004
080 005 081 005 082 005 083 005
This setting determines whether the ground-differential short circuit
protection associated with the corresponding CTS signal (C T S : A l a r m
e n d y ) is blocked
Fig. 3-97
072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150

REF_1: Idiff>
PSx
072 170 073 170 074 170 075 170
REF_2: Idiff>
PSx
072 040 073 040 074 040 075 040
REF_3: Idiff>
PSx
Operate value of the ground differential protection function as referred to the
reference current of the relevant transformer end.
Fig. 3-97
072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151

REF_1: Idiff>>>
PSx
072 171 073 171 074 171 075 171
REF_2: Idiff>>>
PSx
072 041 073 041 074 041 075 041
REF_3: Idiff>>>
PSx
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the ground
differential protection function independently of the restraining variable.
Fig. 3-97
7-69
7 Settings
(continued)
072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162

REF_1: m1
PSx
072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172
REF_2: m1
PSx
072 192 073 192 074 192 075 192
REF_3: m1
PSx
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic with the
operating mode 'Low imped. / sum(IP)'.
Fig. 3-97
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the

range IR < IR,m1 with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High
impedance'.
protection
072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163

REF_1: m2
PSx
072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165
REF_2: m2
PSx
072 193 073 193 074 193 075 193
REF_3: m2
PSx
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the
range IR > IR,m2 with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High
impedance'.
Fig. 3-97
072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164

REF_1: IR,m2
PSx
072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166
REF_2: IR,m2
PSx
072 194 073 194 074 194 075 194
REF_3: IR,m2
PSx
Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m2
(operating mode 'Low imped. / IP,max').
Fig. 3-97
076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050

DTOC1: Enable
PSx
076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070
DTOC2: Enable
PSx
076 180 077 180 078 180 079 180
DTOC3: Enable
PSx
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time
overcurrent protection.
Fig. 3-100
076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067

DTOC1: Block tim.st. IN PSx
076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087
076 108 077 108 078 108 079 108
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take
place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
Fig. 3-103
DTOC1: Gen.starting modePSx
Fig: 3-102,
3-103, 3-104
076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066
076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086

076 106 077 106 078 106 079 106
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result
in the formation of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065
DTOC1: tGS
PSx
076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085
DTOC2: tGS
PSx
076 107 077 107 078 107 079 107
DTOC3: tGS
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC
protection.
DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx
076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063
076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083

076 193 077 193 078 193 079 193
Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of
differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent
protection function.
7-70
Fig. 3-104
Fig: 3-101,
3-102
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: I>
PSx
DTOC2: I>
PSx
DTOC3: I>
PSx
Setting for operate value I>.
076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051
DTOC1: I>>
PSx
DTOC2: I>>
PSx
DTOC3: I>>
PSx
Setting for operate value I>>.
076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052
Fig. 3-101
076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071

076 081 077 081 078 081 079 081
Fig. 3-101
076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072

076 082 077 082 078 082 079 082
076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053

DTOC1: I>>>
PSx
076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163
DTOC2: I>>>
PSx
076 183 077 183 078 183 079 183
DTOC3: I>>>
PSx
Setting for operate value I>>>.
076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151
DTOC1: I> dynamic
PSx
076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161
DTOC2: I> dynamic
PSx
076 181 077 181 078 181 079 181
DTOC3: I> dynamic
PSx
Setting for operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
Fig. 3-101
076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152

DTOC1: I>> dynamic PSx
076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162
076 182 077 182 078 182 079 182
Setting for operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
Fig. 3-101
076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153

DTOC1: I>>> dynamic PSx
076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173
076 109 077 109 078 109 079 109
Setting for operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
Fig. 3-101
DTOC1: tI>
PSx
DTOC2: tI>
PSx
DTOC3: tI>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the I> stage.
076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057
Fig. 3-101
DTOC1: tI>>
PSx
DTOC2: tI>>
PSx
DTOC3: tI>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the I>> stage.
DTOC1: tI>>>
PSx
DTOC2: tI>>>
PSx
DTOC3: tI>>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage.
076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058
DTOC1: Ineg>
PSx
DTOC2: Ineg>
PSx
DTOC3: Ineg>
PSx
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage.
DTOC1: Ineg>>
PSx
DTOC2: Ineg>>
PSx
DTOC3: Ineg>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage.
076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197
Fig. 3-101
076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077

076 187 077 187 078 187 079 187
Fig. 3-101
076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078

076 188 077 188 078 188 079 188
076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059
Fig. 3-101
076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169

076 189 077 189 078 189 079 189
Fig. 3-102
076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207

076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217
076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198
Fig. 3-102
076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208

076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218
7-71
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: Ineg>>>
PSx
DTOC2: Ineg>>>
PSx
DTOC3: Ineg>>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage.
7-72
076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199
Fig. 3-102
076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209

076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219
076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200

DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic PSx
076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210
076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage in dynamic mode. This
operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
Fig. 3-102
076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201

DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx
076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211
076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage in dynamic mode. This
elapsing.
Fig. 3-102
076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202

DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx
076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212
076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage in dynamic mode. This
elapsing.
Fig. 3-102
DTOC1: tIneg>
PSx
DTOC2: tIneg>
PSx
DTOC3: tIneg>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage.
DTOC1: tIneg>>
PSx
DTOC2: tIneg>>
PSx
DTOC3: tIneg>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>> stage.
076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203
Fig. 3-102
DTOC1: tIneg>>>
PSx
DTOC2: tIneg>>>
PSx
DTOC3: tIneg>>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>>> stage.
076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205
DTOC1: IN>
PSx
DTOC2: IN>
PSx
DTOC3: IN>
PSx
Setting for operate value IN>.
DTOC1: IN>>
PSx
DTOC2: IN>>
PSx
DTOC3: IN>>
PSx
Setting for operate value IN>>.
076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054
DTOC1: IN>>>
PSx
DTOC2: IN>>>
PSx
DTOC3: IN>>>
PSx
Setting for operate value IN>>>.
076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056
076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213

076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223
076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204
Fig. 3-102
076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214

076 224 077 224 078 224 079 224
Fig. 3-102
076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215

076 225 077 225 078 225 079 225
Fig. 3-103
076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164

076 184 077 184 078 184 079 184
076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055
Fig. 3-103
076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165

076 185 077 185 078 185 079 185
Fig. 3-103
076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166

076 186 077 186 078 186 079 186
7 Settings
(continued)
076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154

DTOC1: IN> dynamic PSx
076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174
076 194 077 194 078 194 079 194
Setting for operate value IN> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
Fig. 3-103
076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155

DTOC1: IN>> dynamic PSx
076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175
076 195 077 195 078 195 079 195
Setting for operate value IN>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
Fig. 3-103
076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156

DTOC1: IN>>> dynamic PSx
076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176
076 196 077 196 078 196 079 196
Setting for operate value IN>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is
only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060
DTOC1: tIN>
PSx
076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170
DTOC2: tIN>
PSx
076 190 077 190 078 190 079 190
DTOC3: tIN>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the IN> stage.
Fig. 3-103
DTOC1: tIN>>
PSx
DTOC2: tIN>>
PSx
DTOC3: tIN>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> stage.
DTOC1: tIN>>>
PSx
DTOC2: tIN>>>
PSx
DTOC3: tIN>>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> stage.
Fig. 3-103
076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061
Fig. 3-103
076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171

076 191 077 191 078 191 079 191
076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062
Fig. 3-103
076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172

076 192 077 192 078 192 079 192
7-73
7 Settings
(continued)
Protection
081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050

IDMT1: Enable
PSx
081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170
IDMT2: Enable
PSx
081 190 082 190 083 190 084 190
IDMT3: Enable
PSx
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for inverse-time
overcurrent protection.
Fig. 3-107
081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068

IDMT1: Block tim.st. IN PSx
081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188
081 208 082 208 083 208 084 208
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take
place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
Fig. 3-114
IDMT1: Gen.starting modePSx
Fig: 3-113,
3-114, 3-116
081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059
081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179

081 199 082 199 083 199 084 199
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result
in the formation of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058
IDMT1: tGS
PSx
081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178
IDMT2: tGS
PSx
081 198 082 198 083 198 084 198
IDMT3: tGS
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT
protection.
IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl PSx
081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060
081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180

081 200 082 200 083 200 084 200
Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be
able to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051
IDMT1: Iref,P
PSx
081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171
IDMT2: Iref,P
PSx
081 191 082 191 083 191 084 191
IDMT3: Iref,P
PSx
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).
7-74
Fig. 3-116
Fig: 3-112,
3-113
Fig. 3-112
081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052

IDMT1: Iref,P dynamic PSx
081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172
081 192 082 192 083 192 084 192
Setting for the reference current (phase current system) in dynamic mode.
This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic
parameters is elapsing.
Fig. 3-112
081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053

IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx
081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173
081 193 082 193 083 193 084 193
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054
IDMT1: Factor kt,P PSx
081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174
081 194 082 194 083 194 084 194
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current
system).
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-112
7 Settings
(continued)
081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057

IDMT1: Min. trip t. P PSx
081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177
081 197 082 197 083 197 084 197
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system).
Fig. 3-112
IDMT1: Hold time P
Fig: 3-112, 3115
PSx
081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055
081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175

IDMT2: Hold time P PSx
081 195 082 195 083 195 084 195
IDMT3: Hold time P PSx
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has
dropped out (phase current system).
081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056
IDMT1: Release P
PSx
081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176
IDMT2: Release P
PSx
081 196 082 196 083 196 084 196
IDMT3: Release P
PSx
Setting for the reset characteristic (phase current system).
081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111
IDMT1: Iref,neg
PSx
081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121
IDMT2: Iref,neg
PSx
081 131 082 131 083 131 084 131
IDMT3: Iref,neg
PSx
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
Fig. 3-112
081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112

IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx
081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122
081 132 082 132 083 132 084 132
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
Fig. 3-113
081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113

IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx
081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123
081 133 082 133 083 133 084 133
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114
IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx
081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124
081 134 082 134 083 134 084 134
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence
current system).
Fig. 3-113
081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117

IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx
081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127
081 137 082 137 083 137 084 137
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current
system).
Fig. 3-113
081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115

IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx
081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125
081 135 082 135 083 135 084 135
dropped out (negative-sequence current system).
Fig. 3-113
081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116

IDMT1: Release neg PSx
081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126
081 136 082 136 083 136 084 136
Setting for the reset characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
Fig. 3-113
7-75
7 Settings
(continued)
7-76
081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061

IDMT1: Iref,N
PSx
081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181
IDMT2: Iref,N
PSx
081 201 082 201 083 201 084 201
IDMT3: Iref,N
PSx
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).
Fig. 3-114
081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062

IDMT1: Iref,N dynamic PSx
081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182
081 202 082 202 083 202 084 202
Setting for the reference current (residual current system) in dynamic mode.
This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic
parameters is elapsing.
Fig. 3-114
081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063

IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx
081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183
081 203 082 203 083 203 084 203
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
Fig. 3-114
081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064

IDMT1: Factor kt,N PSx
081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184
081 204 082 204 083 204 084 204
Setting for the kt,N factor of the starting characteristic (residual current
system).
Fig. 3-114
081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067

IDMT1: Min. trip t. N PSx
081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187
081 207 082 207 083 207 084 207
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (residual current system).
081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065
IDMT1: Hold time N PSx
081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185
081 205 082 205 083 205 084 205
dropped out (residual current system).
Fig. 3-114
081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066

IDMT1: Release N
PSx
081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186
IDMT2: Release N
PSx
081 206 082 206 083 206 084 206
IDMT3: Release N
PSx
Setting for the reset characteristic (residual current system).
Fig. 3-114
Fig. 3-114
7 Settings
(continued)
081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070

Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Enable
PSx
081 090 082 090 083 090 084 090
THRM2: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload
Fig. 3-119
081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074

THRM1: Iref
PSx
081 094 082 094 083 094 084 094
THRM2: Iref
PSx
Setting for the reference current.
081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075
THRM1: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
081 095 082 095 083 095 084 095
THRM2: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
Starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible
continuous thermal current of the protected object:
I therm,prot.object
k=
Inom,prot.object
Fig. 3-123
081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082

THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
081 102 082 102 083 102 084 102
THRM2: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Fig. 3-123
081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083

THRM1: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
081 103 082 103 083 103 084 103
THRM2: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
Note:
This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other
cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077
THRM1: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097
THRM2: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
Fig. 3-123
081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080

THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
081 100 082 100 083 100 084 100
THRM2: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Fig. 3-123
Note:
This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
081 072 082 072 083 072 084 072
THRM1: Select CTA
PSx
081 092 082 092 083 092 084 092
THRM2: Select CTA
PSx
Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from:
No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead.
Data acquisition via the PT 100 input
Data acquisition via the 20 mA input.
Fig. 3-122
081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081

THRM1: Default CTA PSx
081 101 082 101 083 101 084 101
THRM2: Default CTA PSx
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time
if there is no data acquisition for the coolant temperature.
Fig. 3-123
7-77
7 Settings
(continued)
081 073 082 073 083 073 084 073

THRM1: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
081 093 082 093 083 093 084 093
THRM2: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will
be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
Fig. 3-122
THRM1: Rel. O/T warning PSx

THRM2: Rel. O/T warning PSx
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
THRM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx
THRM2: Rel. O/T trip PSx
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
Fig. 3-123
081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079

081 099 082 099 083 099 084 099
081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076
Note:
If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here will
be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078
THRM1: Hysteresis trip PSx
081 098 082 098 083 098 084 098
THRM2: Hysteresis trip PSx
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085
THRM1: Warning pre-trip PSx
081 105 082 105 083 105 084 105
THRM2: Warning pre-trip PSx
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the warning time and the trip time is set here.
7-78
Fig. 3-123
081 096 082 096 083 096 084 096
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-123
7 Settings
(continued)
076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000

V<>: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which time-voltage protection is
enabled.
Fig. 3-125
V<>: V>
PSx
Setting for operate value V>.
V<>: V>>
PSx
Setting for operate value V>>.
076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
Fig. 3-126
076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
Fig. 3-126
076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005

V<>: tV>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
Fig. 3-126
076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006

V<>: tV>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
V<>: V<
PSx
Setting for operate value V<.
Fig. 3-126
V<>: V<<
PSx
Setting for operate value V<<.
076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
Fig. 3-127
076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046

V<>: Vmin>
PSx
Setting for the operate value Vmin>.
076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
V<>: tV<
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
Fig. 3-127
076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010

V<>: tV<<
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
V<>: tTransient
PSx
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
Fig. 3-127
076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048

V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
Fig. 3-126
Fig. 3-127
Fig. 3-127
Fig. 3-127
7-79
7 Settings
(continued)
018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199

f<>: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
Fig. 3-128
018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123

f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx
018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
Fig. 3-131
018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103

f<>: f1
PSx
018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
f<>: f2
PSx
018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
f<>: f3
PSx
018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
f<>: f4
PSx
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies:
The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
Fig. 3-131
018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107

f<>: tf1
PSx
018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
f<>: tf2
PSx
018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
f<>: tf3
PSx
018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
f<>: tf4
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
Fig. 3-131
f<>: df1/dt
PSx
f<>: df2/dt
PSx
f<>: df3/dt
PSx
f<>: df4/dt
PSx
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
Fig. 3-131
018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111

018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Note:
This setting is effective only if operating mode
'f with df/dt' has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1
PSx
f<>: Delta f2
PSx
f<>: Delta f3
PSx
f<>: Delta f4
PSx
Setting for Delta f.
018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
Fig. 3-131
018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139

018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Note:
'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1
PSx
f<>: Delta t2
PSx
f<>: Delta t3
PSx
f<>: Delta t4
PSx
Setting for Delta t.
018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
Fig. 3-131
018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143

018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Note:
'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.
7-80
7 Settings
(continued)
081 210 082 210 083 210 084 210

V/f: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which overfluxing protection is
enabled.
Fig. 3-132
081 211 082 211 083 211 084 211

V/f: V/f> (alarm) PSx
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
081 212 082 212 083 212 084 212
V/f: V/f(t)>
PSx
Setting for the operate value of the time-dependent elements.
Fig. 3-134
081 213 082 213 083 213 084 213

V/f: V/f>>
PSx
Setting for the operate value of the time-independent elements.
Fig. 3-135
081 214 082 214 083 214 084 214

V/f: tV/f>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the warning stage.
081 217 082 217 083 217 084 217
V/f: t at V/f=1.05 PSx
081 218 082 218 083 218 084 218
081 219 082 219 083 219 084 219
081 220 082 220 083 220 084 220
081 221 082 221 083 221 084 221
081 222 082 222 083 222 084 222
081 223 082 223 083 223 084 223
081 224 082 224 083 224 084 224
081 225 082 225 083 225 084 225
081 226 082 226 083 226 084 226
081 227 082 227 083 227 084 227
081 228 082 228 083 228 084 228
The value pairs set here for overfluxing and trip time define the tripping
characteristic of the inverse-time trip stage for overfluxing protection.
The value set at V/f = 1.60 is also valid for V/f > 1.60.
Fig. 3-134
081 230 082 230 083 230 084 230

V/f: Reset time
PSx
The value set here for the reset time defines the decreasing rate for the
overfluxing protection memory.
081 229 082 229 083 229 084 229
V/f: tV/f>>
PSx
Setting for the operate delay of the definite-time trip stage.
Fig. 3-137
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-138
Fig. 3-135
7-81
7 Settings
(continued)
Current Transformer
Supervision
001 118 001 119 001 120 001 121

CTS: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which current transformer
supervision (CTS) is enabled.
Fig. 3-140
001 111 001 115 001 116 001 117

CTS: Ipos>
PSx
Setting for operate value Ipos> as a quantity normalized to Iref.
(Ipos = positive-sequence current)
Fig. 3-142
001 102 001 103 001 104 001 105

CTS: Ineg/Ipos>
PSx
001 122 001 123 001 124 001 125
CTS: Ineg/Ipos>> PSx
Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos.
(Ineg = negative-sequence current, Ipos = positive-sequence current)
001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129
CTS: Operate delay PSx
Fig. 3-142
Setting for the operate delay.

CTS: t(Latch)
PSx
001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133
Fig. 3-142
Fig: 3-145, 3146

Fig: 3-145,
3-146
Setting for the latching time-delay.

081 038 082 038 083 038 084 038
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: Enable
PSx
081 039 082 039 083 039 084 039
MCM_2: Enable
PSx
081 040 082 040 083 040 084 040
MCM_3: Enable
PSx
081 041 082 041 083 041 084 041
MCM_4: Enable
PSx
This setting defines the parameter subset in which measuring-circuit
monitoring (MCM_x) is enabled.
MCM_1: Ineg/Ipos>
MCM_2: Ineg/Ipos>
MCM_3: Ineg/Ipos>
MCM_4: Ineg/Ipos>
PSx
PSx
PSx
PSx
081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042
Fig. 3-147
Fig. 3-148
081 043 082 043 083 043 084 043

081 044 082 044 083 044 084 044
081 045 082 045 083 045 084 045
Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos.

(Ineg = negative-sequence current, Ipos = positive-sequence current)
MCM_1: Operate delay PSx
Setting for the operate delay.
7-82
081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046
Fig. 3-148
081 047 082 047 083 047 084 047

081 048 082 048 083 048 084 048
081 049 082 049 083 049 084 049
8 Information and Control Functions
Information and Control Functions
The P63x generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel.
All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the menu tree.
Note:
In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is
indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which
displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet,
"Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
8.1
Healthy
8.1.1
8.1.1.1
Measured Data Input
Cyclic Values
MEASI: Current IDC

Display of the input current.
MEASI: Current IDC p.u.
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
004 134
Fig. 3-22
004 135
Fig. 3-22
MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
004 136
Fig: 3-22,
3-23,3-150
004 180
Fig. 3-23
004 133
Fig: 3-24,
3-151
MEASI: Temperature p.u.

Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer
referred to 100C.
004 221
Fig. 3-24
MEASO: Current A-1

MEASO: Current A-2
Display of the current on the analog measured data output
(A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)
005 100
Fig. 3-32
MAIN: Date
Date display.
003 090
Fig. 3-59
003 091
Fig. 3-59
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin
Display of the scaled linearized value.
MEASI: Temperature
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.
Main function
Note:
The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time of day
Display of the time of day.
Note:
005 099
The time can also be set here.
8-1

(continued)
MAIN: Time switching

Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
003 095
Fig. 3-59
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times

assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram
from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
004 040 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: Frequency f
Display of system frequency.
005 101 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a prim.
005 102 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b prim.
005 103 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,c prim.
005 115 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,d prim.
Display of the maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a
primary quantity.
005 162 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay a
006 162 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay b
007 162 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay c
008 162 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay d
Display of the delayed maximum current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as
a primary quantity.
005 161 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.stored a
006 161 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.stored b
007 161 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.stored c
008 161 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: IP,max prim.stored d
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d,
respectively, as a primary quantity.
005 104 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a prim.
005 105 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b prim.
005 106 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,c prim.
005 117 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,d prim.
Display of the minimum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a
primary quantity.
005 021 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IA,a prim.
005 022 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IA,b prim.
005 023 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IA,c prim.
005 024 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IA,d prim.
Display of phase current A of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary
quantity.
8-2

(continued)
006 021 Fig. 3-41

MAIN: Current IB,a prim.
006 022 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IB,b prim.
006 023 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IB,c prim.
006 024 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IB,d prim.
Display of phase current B of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary
quantity.
007 021 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IC,a prim.
007 022 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IC,b prim.
007 023 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IC,c prim.
007 024 Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current IC,d prim.
Display of phase current C of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary
quantity.
005 125 Page: 3-74
MAIN: Current Ineg a prim.
005 129
MAIN: Current Ineg b prim.
005 136
MAIN: Current Ineg c prim.
005 140
MAIN: Current Ineg d prim.
Display of the negative-sequence current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as
a primary quantity.
005 127 Page: 3-74
MAIN: Current Ipos a prim.
005 134
MAIN: Current Ipos b prim.
005 138
MAIN: Current Ipos c prim.
005 146
MAIN: Current Ipos d prim.
Display of the positive-sequence current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as
a primary quantity.
005 121 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IN,a prim.
005 122 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IN,b prim.
005 123 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IN,c prim.
005 124 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Current IN,d prim.
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the
phase currents, end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity.
005 131 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IY,a prim.
005 132 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IY,b prim.
005 133 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IY,c prim.
Display of the current value as a primary quantity measured by the P63x at
the T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
MAIN: Voltage V prim.

Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as a primary quantity.
005 018
Fig. 3-45
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
005 111
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b p.u.
005 112
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,d p.u.
005 116
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,c p.u.
005 113
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Display of the maximum phase current, end a, b, c or d, respectively,

referred to Inom.
8-3

(continued)
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay a
005 163
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay b
006 163
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay c
007 163
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay d
008 163
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end a, b, c or d,

respectively, referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current IA,a p.u.
MAIN: Current IA,b p.u.
MAIN: Current IA,c p.u.
MAIN: Current IA,d p.u.
005 031
Fig. 3-41
005 032
Fig. 3-41
005 033
Fig. 3-41
005 039
Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current A, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.

005 038 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: Current IA,add p.u.
006 038 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: Current IB,add p.u.
007 038 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: Current IC,add p.u.
Display of phase current A, B or C, respectively, for the virtual end, referred
to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at
M A IN : C ur r e n t s um mati on .
005 155 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: Current IN,add p.u.
Display of residual current for the virtual end, referred to Inom. The virtual
end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Cu rren t s umm a tion .
005 114 Fig. 3-44
MAIN: IP,max,add p.u.
Display of the maximum phase current for the virtual end, referred to Inom.
The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M AIN : Curr en t
su mma tion.
MAIN: IP,min,add p.u.
005 110
Fig. 3-44
Display of the minimum phase current for the virtual end, referred to Inom.
su mma tion.
MAIN: Curr. Ineg,add p.u.
005 149
Page: 3-74
Display of negative-sequence current for the virtual end, referred to Inom.

su mma tion.
005 150 Page: 3-74
MAIN: Curr. Ipos,add p.u.
Display of positive-sequence current for the virtual end, referred to Inom.
su mma tion.
MAIN: Current IB,a p.u.
MAIN: Current IB,b p.u.
MAIN: Current IB,c p.u.
MAIN: Current IB,d p.u.
006 031
Fig. 3-41
006 032
Fig. 3-41
006 033
Fig. 3-41
006 034
Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current B, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IC,a p.u.
MAIN: Current IC,b p.u.
MAIN: Current IC,c p.u.
MAIN: Current IC,d p.u.
007 031
Fig. 3-41
007 032
Fig. 3-41
007 033
Fig. 3-41
007 034
Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current C, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ineg a p.u.
8-4
005 126
Page: 3-74

(continued)
MAIN: Current Ineg b p.u.

MAIN: Current Ineg c p.u.
MAIN: Current Ineg d p.u.
Display of the negative-sequence current, end a, b, c or d, respectively,
referred to Inom.
005 130
005 137
005 145
005 141 Fig. 3-42

MAIN: Current IN,a p.u.
005 142 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IN,b p.u.
005 143 Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Current IN,c p.u.
005 144 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Current IN,d p.u.
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the
phase currents, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored a
005 160
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored b
006 160
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored c
007 160
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored d
008 160
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end a, b, c or d,

respectively, referred to Inom.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a p.u.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b p.u.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,c p.u.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,d p.u.
Display of the minimum phase current, end a, b, c or d, respectively,
referred to Inom.
005 107
Fig. 3-41
005 108
Fig. 3-41
005 109
Fig. 3-41
005 118
Fig. 3-41
MAIN: Current Ipos a p.u.

MAIN: Current Ipos b p.u.
MAIN: Current Ipos c p.u.
MAIN: Current Ipos d p.u.
Display of the positive-sequence current, end a, b, c or d, respectively,
referred to Inom.
005 128
Page: 3-74
MAIN: Current IY,a p.u.

MAIN: Current IY,b p.u.
MAIN: Current IY,c p.u.
005 151
Fig. 3-42
005 152
Fig. 3-42
005 153
Fig. 3-42
005 135
005 139
005 147
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to Inom measured by the

P63x at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
005 019 Fig. 3-45
MAIN: Voltage V p.u.
Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end c
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end d
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end a, b, c or d, respectively.
005 089
Fig. 3-47
005 092
Fig. 3-47
005 093
Fig. 3-47
005 095
Fig. 3-47
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a

MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end c
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end d
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end a, b, c or d, respectively.
006 089
Fig. 3-47
006 092
Fig. 3-47
006 093
Fig. 3-47
006 095
Fig. 3-47
8-5

(continued)
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a

MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end c
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end d
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end a, b, c or d, respectively.
007 089
Fig. 3-47
007 092
Fig. 3-47
007 093
Fig. 3-47
007 095
Fig. 3-47
MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-b

MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-b
MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-b
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase A, B or C,
respectively.
MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-c
MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-c
MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-c
Display of the phase shift between ends a and c for phase A, B or C,
respectively.
005 090
Fig. 3-48
006 090
Fig. 3-48
007 090
Fig. 3-48
005 091
Fig. 3-48
006 091
Fig. 3-48
007 091
Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-d

MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-d
MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-d
Display of the phase shift between ends a and d for phase A, B or C,
respectively.
005 094
Fig. 3-48
006 094
Fig. 3-48
007 094
Fig. 3-48
005 077 Fig. 3-49

MAIN: Angle phi NY, end a
005 078 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end b
005 079 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end c
Display of the phase displacement between the residual current calculated
by the P63x from the three phase currents and the current measured at the
T14, T24 or T34 transformer.
DIFF: Diff. current 1

Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3,
respectively, referred to Iref.
005 080
Fig. 3-92
006 080
Fig. 3-92
007 080
Fig. 3-92
DIFF: Restrain. current 1

Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3,
005 081
Fig. 3-92
006 081
Fig. 3-92
007 081
Fig. 3-92
008 080
Fig. 3-98
Ground differential protection REF_1: Diff. current, REF_1

(Br: Restricted earth fault protection)
8-6
REF_2: Diff. current, REF_2

REF_3: Diff. current, REF_3
Display of the differential current referred to Iref.
008 070
REF_1: Restrain.curr.,REF_1
Display of the restraining current referred to Iref.
008 081
008 060
Fig. 3-98
008 071
008 061

(continued)
004 150 Fig. 3-123

Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Status replica, TH1
004 175
THRM2: Status replica, TH2
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function,
THRM1 or THRM2.
004 151 Fig. 3-123
THRM1: Object temperat.,TH1
004 171
THRM2: Object temperat.TH2
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function
THRM1 or THRM2.
004 154 Fig. 3-123
THRM1: Coolant temp. TH1
004 174
THRM2: Coolant temp. TH2
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object.
Depending on the setting at T HR M1 : Se lec t C TA or T HRM 2: Se lec t
CT A for coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be
displayed:
Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value.

Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the
Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the
20 mA input.
THRM1: Pre-trip t. left,TH1
THRM2: Pre-trip t. left,TH2
Display of the time remaining before the THRM1 or THRM2 thermal
overload protection function reaches the trip threshold.
004 153
Fig. 3-123
004 173
004 204 Fig. 3-123

THRM1: Stat. repl., p.u.TH1
004 207
THRM2: Stat. repl., p.u.TH2
Display of the buffer content of the THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, thermal
overload protection function referred to a buffer content of 100%.
004 205 Fig. 3-123
THRM1: Object temp. p.u. 1
004 208
THRM2: Object temp. p.u. 2
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, referred to 100C.
004 206 Fig. 3-123
THRM1: Coolant temp. p.u. 1
004 209
THRM2: Coolant temp. p.u. 2
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object referred to 100C.
004 170 Fig. 3-123
THRM1: Temp. offset repl. 1
004 190
THRM2: Temp. offset repl. 2
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into
account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
8-7

(continued)
V/f: Excitation V/f p.u.
004 220
Fig: 3-133,
3-134,
3-135,3-138
Display of the V/f ratio, as a quantity referred to Vnom/fnom.

004 222 Fig. 3-138
V/f: Status replica in %
Display of the buffer content in % of the overfluxing protection function.
004 223 Fig. 3-138
V/f: Status replica p.u.
Display of the buffer content as a quantity referred to 100 % of the buffer
content of the overfluxing protection function.
8.1.1.2
Substation Event
8-8
Physical State Signals
GOOSE: Output 1 state
106 010

Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
106 012
106 014
106 016
106 018
106 020
106 022
106 024
106 026
106 028
106 030
106 032
106 034
106 036
106 038
106 040
106 042
106 044
106 046
106 048
106 050
106 052
106 054
106 056
106 058
106 060
106 062
106 064
106 066
106 068
106 070
106 072

(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 state

Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
106 200
106 201
106 202
106 203
106 204
106 205
106 206
106 207
106 208
106 209
106 210
106 211
106 212
106 213
106 214
106 215
8-9

(continued)

Status Events
8-10
GSSE: Output 1 state
104 100

Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
104 103
104 106
104 109
104 112
104 115
104 118
104 121
104 124
104 127
104 130
104 133
104 136
104 139
104 142
104 145
104 148
104 151
104 154
104 157
104 160
104 163
104 166
104 169
104 172
104 175
104 178
104 181
104 184
104 187
104 190
104 193

(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 state

GSSE: Input 2 state
GSSE: Input 3 state
GSSE: Input 4 state
GSSE: Input 5 state
GSSE: Input 6 state
GSSE: Input 7 state
GSSE: Input 8 state
GSSE: Input 9 state
GSSE: Input 10 state
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
105 000
105 005
105 010
105 015
105 020
105 025
105 030
105 035
105 040
105 045
105 050
105 055
105 060
105 065
105 070
105 075
105 080
105 085
105 090
105 095
105 100
105 105
105 110
105 115
105 120
105 125
105 130
105 135
105 140
105 145
105 150
105 155
8-11

(continued)
Binary input
INP: State U 1201

INP: State U 1202
INP: State U 1203
INP: State U 1204
INP: State U 1401
INP: State U 1402
INP: State U 1403
INP: State U 1404
INP: State U 1405
INP: State U 1406
INP: State U 1407
INP: State U 1408
INP: State U 1409
INP: State U 1410
INP: State U 1411
INP: State U 1412
INP: State U 1413
INP: State U 1414
INP: State U 1415
INP: State U 1416
INP: State U 1417
INP: State U 1418
INP: State U 1419
INP: State U 1420
INP: State U 1421
INP: State U 1422
INP: State U 1423
INP: State U 1424
INP: State U 1601
INP: State U 1602
INP: State U 1603
INP: State U 1604
INP: State U 1605
INP: State U 1606
INP: State U 2001
INP: State U 2002
INP: State U 2003
INP: State U 2004
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
152 198
152 201
152 204
152 207
190 001
190 005
190 009
190 013
190 017
190 021
190 025
190 029
190 033
190 037
190 041
190 045
190 049
190 053
190 057
190 061
190 065
190 069
190 073
190 077
190 081
190 085
190 089
190 093
192 001
192 005
192 009
192 013
192 017
192 021
153 086
153 089
153 092
153 095
'Without function':
No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
'Low':
Not energized.
'High':
Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.
8-12

(continued)
Binary outputs
OUTP: State K 1201

OUTP: State K 1202
OUTP: State K 1601
OUTP: State K 1602
OUTP: State K 1603
OUTP: State K 1604
OUTP: State K 1605
OUTP: State K 1606
OUTP: State K 1607
OUTP: State K 1608
OUTP: State K 1801
OUTP: State K 1802
OUTP: State K 1803
OUTP: State K 1804
OUTP: State K 1805
OUTP: State K 1806
OUTP: State K 2001
OUTP: State K 2002
OUTP: State K 2003
OUTP: State K 2004
OUTP: State K 2005
OUTP: State K 2006
OUTP: State K 2007
OUTP: State K 2008
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
'Without function':
No functions are assigned to the output relay.
'Low':
The output relay is not energized.
'High':
The output relay is energized.
151 008
151 011
171 001
171 005
171 009
171 013
171 017
171 021
171 025
171 029
173 001
173 005
173 009
173 013
173 017
173 021
151 200
151 203
151 206
151 209
151 212
151 215
151 218
151 221
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.
8-13

(continued)
LED indicators
8-14
LED: State H 2
LED: State H 3
LED: State H 4
LED: State H 5
LED: State H 6
LED: State H 7
LED: State H 8
LED: State H 9
LED: State H 10
LED: State H 11
LED: State H 12
LED: State H 13
LED: State H 14
LED: State H 15
LED: State H 16
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
'Inactive':
The LED indicator is not energized.
'Active':
The LED indicator is energized.
085 000
085 003
085 006
085 009
085 012
085 015
085 018
085 021
085 024
085 027
085 030
085 033
085 036
085 039
085 042

(continued)
8.1.1.3
Logic State Signals
Local control panel
LOC: Illumination on EXT
037 101
COMM1: Command block. EXT

COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT
003 173
Fig. 3-6
037 074
COMM1: Command blocking
003 174
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.
037 075
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103

COMM1: IEC 870-5-101
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS
COMM1: MODBUS
COMM1: DNP3
COMM1: COURIER
003 219
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Fig: 3-6,
3-8,3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12
Fig: 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Fig. 3-7
003 218
Fig. 3-8
003 221
Fig. 3-9
003 223
Fig. 3-10
003 230
Fig. 3-11
103 041
Fig. 3-12
105 180
IEC: Comm. link faulty
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!

Substation Event
GOOSE: IED link faulty
107 250
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried
out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
Status Events
GSSE: IED link faulty
105 181
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. The GSSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp to each GSSE. Up to that time a repetition of GSSE will be carried
out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
IRIG-B
Measured Data Input
IRIGB: Enabled
IRIGB: Synchron. ready
023 201
Fig. 3-17
023 202
Fig. 3-17
MEASI: Enabled
035 008
MEASI: PT100 open circuit
040 190
MEASI: Overload 20 mA input
040 191
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.
040 192
Fig: 3-19,
3-22,3-24
Fig: 3-24,
3-122
Fig: 3-22,
3-122
Fig: 3-22,
3-122
8-15

(continued)
Binary outputs
Main function
8-16
OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT

OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked
OUTP: Latching reset
040 014
Fig. 3-25
040 015
Fig. 3-25
021 015
Fig. 3-25
040 088
Fig. 3-25
MEASO: Enabled
037 102
MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT

MEASO: Reset output EXT
MEASO: Output reset
MEASO: Valid BCD value
MEASO: 1-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
MEASO: Value A-1 valid
MEASO: Value A-1 output
MEASO: Value A-2 valid
MEASO: Value A-2 output
036 085
Fig: 3-27,
3-30,3-32
Fig. 3-28
036 087
Fig. 3-29
037 117
Fig. 3-29
037 050
Fig. 3-30
037 051
Fig. 3-30
037 052
Fig. 3-30
037 053
Fig. 3-30
037 054
Fig. 3-30
037 055
Fig. 3-30
037 056
Fig. 3-30
037 057
Fig. 3-30
037 058
Fig. 3-30
037 059
Fig. 3-30
037 060
Fig. 3-30
069 014
Fig. 3-32
037 118
Fig. 3-32

MAIN: Phase reversal activ
MAIN: Enable protect. EXT
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT
MAIN: Time switching EXT
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
036 174
Page: 3-86
036 175
Page: 3-86
036 176
Page: 3-86
036 220
Fig. 3-37
003 027
Fig. 3-50
003 026
Fig. 3-50
MAIN: Switch dyn.param.EXT

MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT
MAIN: Test mode EXT
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT
MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT
MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled
MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled
MAIN: Protect. not ready
004 060
069 015
037 119
003 096
040 060
Fig. 3-52
040 061
Fig. 3-52
040 116
Fig. 3-52
040 117
Fig. 3-52
040 138
Fig. 3-57
036 045
Fig. 3-57
004 061
036 033
Fig: 3-125,
3-131,
3-134,3-135,
3-138, 3-139
Fig. 3-51
037 018
Fig. 3-57
037 070
Fig. 3-62
065 001
Fig. 3-60
060 060
Fig. 3-59
003 028
Fig. 3-50
038 046
Fig: 3-5,
3-7,3-8,
3-9,3-14,
3-25,3-50
Fig. 3-54

(continued)
MAIN: Test mode
037 071
MAIN: Blocked/faulty
MAIN: Meas. circ. I faulty
004 065
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked
021 013
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset

MAIN: Manual trip signal
MAIN: Gen. trip signal
040 139
Fig: 3-53,
3-145, 3-149
Fig: 3-54,
3-57
Fig. 3-57
034 017
Fig. 3-57
036 251
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1

MAIN: Gen. trip command 1
036 005
Fig: 3-57,
3-141
Fig. 3-57
036 023
Fig. 3-57
036 108
Fig. 3-57
036 109
Fig. 3-57
036 071

MAIN: General starting
036 022
Fig: 3-57,
3-58,3-123
Fig. 3-57
036 113
Fig. 3-57
036 114
Fig. 3-57
036 000
MAIN: Dynam. param. active
040 090
Fig: 3-41,
3-42,3-43,
3-44,3-45,
3-46,3-47,
3-48,3-49,
3-55, 3-56,
3-71
Fig: 3-51,
3-101,3-102,
3-103,3-112,
3-113,3-114
PSS: Control via user EXT

PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT
PSS: Control via user
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset
PSS: PS 1 activated ext.
PSS: Actual param. subset
PSS: PS 1 active
036 101
Fig. 3-63
065 002
Fig. 3-63
065 003
Fig. 3-63
065 004
Fig. 3-63
065 005
Fig. 3-63
036 102
Fig. 3-63
003 061
Fig. 3-63
036 094
Fig. 3-63
036 095
Fig. 3-63
036 096
Fig. 3-63
036 097
Fig. 3-63
003 062
Fig. 3-63
036 090
PSS: PS 2 active
036 091
PSS: PS 3 active
036 092
PSS: PS 4 active
036 093
Fig: 3-63,
3-140
Fig: 3-63,
3-140
Fig: 3-63,
3-140
Fig: 3-63,
3-140
036 155
Fig: 3-5,
3-7,3-8,
3-9,3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-14,3-62
Fig. 3-54
8-17

(continued)
Self-Monitoring
8-18
SFMON: Faulty DSP

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP
SFMON: Warning (LED)
SFMON: Warning (relay)
SFMON: Warm restart exec.
SFMON: Cold restart exec.
SFMON: Cold restart
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
SFMON: Hardware clock fail.
SFMON: Battery failure
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded
SFMON: +15V supply faulty
SFMON: -15V supply faulty
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1
SFMON: Defect.module slot10
093 127
093 128
036 070
Fig. 3-64
036 100
Fig. 3-64
041 202
041 201
093 024
093 025
090 019
041 200
093 040
090 010
096 121
093 081
093 082
093 080
096 100
096 101
096 102
096 103
096 104
096 105
096 106
096 107
096 108
096 109
096 110
096 111
096 112
096 113
096 114
096 115
096 116
096 117
096 118
096 119
096 120
097 000
097 001
097 002
097 003
097 004
097 005
097 006
097 007
097 008
097 009
097 010
097 011
097 012
097 013
097 014
097 015

(continued)

SFMON: Module A DPR faulty
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty
SFMON: Error K 1201
SFMON: Error K 1202
SFMON: Error K 1601
SFMON: Error K 1602
SFMON: Error K 1603
SFMON: Error K 1604
SFMON: Error K 1605
SFMON: Error K 1606
SFMON: Error K 1607
SFMON: Error K 1608
SFMON: Error K 1801
SFMON: Error K 1802
SFMON: Error K 1803
SFMON: Error K 1804
SFMON: Error K 1805
SFMON: Error K 1806
SFMON: Error K 2001
SFMON: Error K 2002
SFMON: Error K 2003
SFMON: Error K 2004
SFMON: Error K 2005
SFMON: Error K 2006
SFMON: Error K 2007
SFMON: Error K 2008
SFMON: Undef. operat. code
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op.
SFMON: Undefined interrupt
SFMON: Exception oper.syst.
SFMON: Protection failure
SFMON: Checksum error param
SFMON: Clock sync. error
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC
SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block.
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.comm.
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y
SFMON: Time-out module Y
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty
097 016
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a
091 026
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b

SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, c
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, d
091 027
097 017
097 018
097 019
097 020
093 070
093 071
093 110
093 111
097 118
097 119
097 150
097 151
097 152
097 153
097 154
097 155
097 156
097 157
097 166
097 167
097 168
097 169
097 170
097 171
097 182
097 183
097 184
097 185
097 186
097 187
097 188
097 189
093 010
093 011
093 012
093 013
090 021
090 003
093 041
093 026
090 012
Fig. 3-66
093 015
093 075
093 113
093 112
098 000
091 018
Fig: 3-53,
3-145,3-149
Fig: 3-146,
3-148
091 028
091 029
8-19

(continued)
Overload Recording
8-20
SFMON: Invalid charact. V/f

SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC
SFMON: PT100 open circuit
SFMON: Overload 20 mA input
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
SFMON: Setting error f<>
SFMON: Output 30
SFMON: Output 30 (t)
SFMON: Output 31
SFMON: Output 32
SFMON: Iref, a inval. range
SFMON: Iref, b inval. range
SFMON: Iref, c inval. range
SFMON: Iref, d inval. rang
SFMON: Matching fail. end a
SFMON: Matching fail. end b
SFMON: Matching fail. end c
SFMON: Matching fail. end d
SFMON: Ratio mtch.fact.inv.
SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv.
SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1
SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1
SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1
SFMON: Rat.mtch.f.inv.REF_1
SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_1
SFMON: CTA error THRM1
SFMON: Setting error THRM1
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync
091 011
OL_RC: Record. in progress
035 003
OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow
035 007
093 114
Fig. 3-32
093 115
093 116
Fig. 3-22
098 024
Fig. 3-24
098 025
Fig. 3-22
098 026
Fig. 3-22
098 028
Fig. 3-131
098 053
098 054
098 055
098 056
098 057
098 058
091 007
Fig. 3-80
091 008
Fig. 3-80
091 009
Fig. 3-80
091 016
Fig. 3-80
091 000
Fig. 3-80
091 001
Fig. 3-80
091 002
Fig. 3-80
091 017
Fig. 3-80
091 004
091 006
Fig. 3-80
091 105
Fig. 3-94
091 115
091 125
091 101
Fig. 3-94
091 111
091 121
091 102
Fig. 3-94
091 112
091 122
091 103
091 113
091 123
091 104
Fig. 3-94
091 114
091 124
098 036
Fig. 3-122
098 037
098 038
Fig. 3-123
098 039
093 120
Fig: 3-2,
3-67,3-68,
3-69, 3-70
Fig. 3-70

(continued)
Fault Recording
FT_RC: Trigger EXT

FT_RC: Trigger
FT_RC: Id> triggered
FT_RC: IR> triggered
FT_RC: Record. in progress
036 089
Fig. 3-76
037 076
Fig. 3-76
035 018
Fig. 3-76
035 019
Fig. 3-76
035 000
FT_RC: System disturb. runn
035 004
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow

FT_RC: Faulty time tag
035 001
Fig: 3-2,
3-25, 3-34,
3-70, 3-72,
3-73, 3-74,
3-75,3-76,
3-77,3-78
Fig: 3-25,
3-34,3-76
Fig. 3-77
035 002
Fig. 3-70
DIFF: Enabled
041 210
DIFF: Starting
DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg.
041 106
Fig: 3-79,
3-88
Fig. 3-55

DIFF: Id>> triggered
DIFF: Id>>> triggered
DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg.
041 125
Fig: 3-88,
3-89, 3-90,
3-91
Fig. 3-88
041 126
Fig. 3-88
041 221
Fig. 3-88
041 222
Fig. 3-88
041 118

DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 trigg.
041 119
Fig: 3-88,
3-89,3-101,
3-102,3-112,
3-113,3-141
Fig. 3-89
041 120
Fig. 3-89
041 121

DIFF: Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
DIFF: Trip signal
041 122
Fig: 3-88,
3-91,3-141
Fig. 3-91
041 123
Fig. 3-91
041 115
Fig. 3-90
041 116
Fig. 3-90
041 117
Fig. 3-90
041 075
DIFF: Trip signal 1

DIFF: Trip signal 2
DIFF: Trip signal 3
041 002
Fig: 3-72,
3-88,3-89
Fig. 3-88
041 003
Fig. 3-88
041 004
Fig. 3-88
041 132
Fig: 3-93,
3-97
Ground differential protection REF_1: Enabled

(Br: Restricted earth fault protection)
041 124
REF_2: Enabled
REF_3: Enabled
REF_1: Trip signal
041 133
REF_2: Trip signal
041 016
REF_3: Trip signal
041 067
041 134
041 005
Fig: 3-55,
3-72,3-97
Fig: 3-55,
3-72
Fig. 3-55
8-21

(continued)
protection
8-22
DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT
035 120
Fig. 3-101
DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT

DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT
DTOC1: Block. tIneg> EXT
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> EXT
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> EXT
DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT
DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT
DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT
DTOC1: Enabled
035 121
Fig. 3-101
035 122
Fig. 3-101
036 141
Fig. 3-102
036 142
Fig. 3-102
036 143
Fig. 3-102
035 123
Fig. 3-103
035 124
Fig. 3-103
035 125
Fig. 3-103
035 102
DTOC1: General starting
035 128
DTOC1: tGS elapsed

DTOC1: Starting A
035 129
Fig: 3-100,
3-101,
3-102,3-103
Fig: 3-55,
3-72, 3-104,
3-105
Fig. 3-104
DTOC1: Starting B
035 105
DTOC1: Starting C
035 106
DTOC1: Starting N
035 107
DTOC1: Starting I>
035 108
DTOC1: Starting I>>
035 109
DTOC1: Starting I>>>
035 110
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>

DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>>
DTOC1: Starting Ineg
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>>
DTOC1: tIneg> elapsed
DTOC1: tIneg>> elapsed
DTOC1: tIneg>>> elapsed
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>>
DTOC1: Starting IN>
DTOC1: Starting IN>>
DTOC1: Starting IN>>>
DTOC1: tIN> elapsed
DTOC1: tIN>> elapsed
DTOC1: tIN>>> elapsed
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>>
035 114
Fig: 3-101,
3-103
Fig: 3-101,
3-103
Fig: 3-101,
3-103
Fig: 3-103,
3-104
Fig: 3-101,
3-104
Fig: 3-101,
3-104
Fig: 3-101,
3-104
Fig. 3-101
035 115
Fig. 3-101
035 116
Fig. 3-101
036 144
Fig. 3-102
036 145
Fig. 3-102
036 146
Fig. 3-102
036 147
Fig. 3-102
036 148
Fig. 3-102
036 149
Fig. 3-102
036 150
Fig. 3-102
036 151
Fig. 3-102
036 152
Fig. 3-102
036 153
Fig. 3-102
035 111
Fig. 3-103
035 112
Fig. 3-103
035 113
Fig. 3-103
035 117
Fig. 3-103
035 118
Fig. 3-103
035 119
Fig. 3-103
035 126
Fig. 3-103
035 130
Fig. 3-103
035 131
Fig. 3-103
035 104
035 150
035 151
035 229
036 161

(continued)

DTOC2: Enabled
036 162
DTOC2: tGS elapsed

DTOC2: Starting A
DTOC2: Starting B
DTOC2: Starting C
DTOC2: Starting N
DTOC2: Starting I>
DTOC2: Starting I>>
DTOC2: Starting IN>
DTOC2: tIN> elapsed
DTOC3: Enabled
035 245
DTOC3: tGS elapsed

DTOC3: Starting A
DTOC3: Starting B
035 250
036 163
035 230
035 231
035 232
035 132
035 234
Fig: 3-55,
3-72
035 134
035 135
035 141
035 146
035 138
035 139
035 149
035 144
035 145
035 158
036 164
036 165
036 166
036 167
036 168
036 169
036 170
036 171
036 172
036 173
035 152
035 153
035 154
035 159
035 225
035 226
035 233
035 246
035 247
035 237
035 238
035 239
036 181
036 182
036 183
035 240
035 241
035 242
035 136
035 244
Fig: 3-55,
3-72
035 180
035 185
8-23

(continued)
Protection
8-24
DTOC3: Starting C
DTOC3: Starting N
DTOC3: Starting I>
DTOC3: Starting I>>
DTOC3: Starting IN>
DTOC3: tIN> elapsed
035 186
IDMT1: Block. tIref,P> EXT
038 114
Fig. 3-112
IDMT1: Block.tIref,neg> EXT
038 178
IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT

IDMT1: Enabled
038 124
Fig: 3-113,
3-114
Fig. 3-114
IDMT1: General starting
038 115
IDMT1: tGS elapsed

IDMT1: Starting Iref,P>
038 116
IDMT1: Starting Iref,A>
038 117
IDMT1: Starting Iref,B>
038 118
IDMT1: Starting Iref,C>
038 119
IDMT1: tIref,P> elapsed
038 111
IDMT1: Hold time P running
038 112
IDMT1: Memory P clear

IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg>
038 113
IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed

IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg>
038 174
Fig: 3-113,
3-116
Fig. 3-113
038 177
Fig. 3-113
035 187
035 188
035 189
035 190
035 205
035 206
035 208
036 184
036 185
036 186
036 187
036 188
036 189
036 190
036 191
036 192
036 193
035 202
035 203
035 204
035 209
035 235
035 236
035 243
035 251
035 252
038 125
038 110
038 173
Fig: 3-107,
3-112,3-113,
3-114
Fig: 3-55,
3-72,3-116,
3-117
Fig. 3-116
Fig: 3-112,
3-115,3-116
Fig: 3-112,
3-114
Fig: 3-112,
3-114
Fig: 3-112,
3-114
Fig: 3-112,
3-115
Fig: 3-112,
3-115
Fig. 3-112

(continued)
IDMT1: Hold time neg runn.

IDMT1: Memory 'neg' clear
IDMT1: Starting Iref,N>
038 175
Fig. 3-113
038 176
Fig. 3-113
038 120
IDMT1: tIref,N> elapsed

IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,N>
IDMT1: Hold time N running
IDMT1: Memory N clear
IDMT2: Enabled
038 121
Fig: 3-114,
3-116
Fig. 3-114
038 126
Fig. 3-114
038 122
Fig. 3-114
038 123
Fig. 3-114
IDMT2: tGS elapsed

IDMT3: Enabled
038 136
IDMT3: tGS elapsed

038 156
038 134
038 188
038 144
038 145
038 135
Fig: 3-55,
3-72
038 130
038 137
038 138
038 139
038 131
038 132
038 133
038 183
038 184
038 187
038 185
038 186
038 140
038 141
038 146
038 142
038 143
038 154
038 198
038 164
038 165
038 155
Fig: 3-55,
3-72
038 150
038 157
038 158
038 159
038 151
038 152
038 153
038 193
038 194
038 197
038 195
038 196
038 160
038 161
8-25

(continued)

Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Block. replica EXT
8-26
038 166
038 162
038 163
THRM1: CTA error EXT

THRM1: Reset replica EXT
THRM1: Enabled
039 152
Fig: 3-120,
3-123
Fig. 3-122
039 122
Fig. 3-124
039 129
THRM1: Not ready

THRM1: Reset replica
039 154
Fig: 3-119,
3-120,
3-123,3-124
Fig. 3-120
THRM1: Buffer empty

THRM1: CTA error
THRM1: Starting k*Iref>
039 128
THRM1: Within pre-trip time

THRM1: Warning
THRM1: Trip signal
THRM1: Setting error,block.
THRM2: Block. replica EXT
THRM2: CTA error EXT
THRM2: Reset replica EXT
THRM2: Enabled
THRM2: Not ready
THRM2: Reset replica
THRM2: Buffer empty
THRM2: CTA error
THRM2: Starting k*Iref>
THRM2: Within pre-trip time
THRM2: Warning
THRM2: Trip signal
THRM2: Setting error,block.
039 170
V<>: Blocking tV> EXT

V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT
V<>: Enabled
V<>: Ready
041 068
Fig. 3-126
041 069
Fig. 3-126
041 070
Fig. 3-127
041 071
Fig. 3-127
040 066
Fig. 3-125
042 003
V<>: Not ready

V<>: Starting V>
V<>: Starting V>>
V<>: tV> elapsed
V<>: tV>> elapsed
V<>: Starting V<
V<>: Starting V<<
V<>: tV< elapsed
V<>: tV< elapsed & Vmin>
V<>: tV< elaps. transient
V<>: Fault V<
042 004
Fig: 3-125,
3-126,3-127
Fig. 3-125
041 030
Fig. 3-126
041 096
Fig. 3-126
041 034
Fig. 3-126
041 035
Fig. 3-126
041 037
Fig. 3-127
041 099
Fig. 3-127
041 041
Fig. 3-127
041 026
Fig. 3-127
042 023
Fig. 3-127
041 110
Fig. 3-127
039 150
039 125
Fig: 3-123,
3-124
039 127
Fig. 3-122
039 151
039 153
Fig: 3-69,
3-123
Fig. 3-123
039 124
Fig. 3-123
039 123
Fig. 3-123
039 126
Fig: 3-120,
3-123
039 172
039 182
039 189
039 174
039 185
039 188
039 187
039 171
039 173
039 184
039 183
039 186

(continued)
Over-/Underfrequency
Protection
V<>: tV<< elapsed

V<>: tV<< elapsed & Vmin>
V<>: tV<< elapsed trans.
V<>: Fault V<<
V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans.
041 042
Fig. 3-127
041 066
Fig. 3-127
042 025
Fig. 3-127
041 112
Fig. 3-127
042 007
Fig. 3-127
f<>: Blocking f1 EXT
042 103
Fig. 3-131

f<>: Enabled
f<>: Ready
042 104
f<>: Not ready

f<>: Blocked by V<
042 140
f<>: Starting f1
f<>: Starting f2
f<>: Starting f3
f<>: Starting f4
f<>: Starting f1/df1
f<>: Delta f1 triggered
f<>: Delta t1 elapsed
f<>: Trip signal f1
f<>: Trip signal f2
f<>: Trip signal f3
f<>: Trip signal f4
042 107
V/f:
V/f:
V/f:
V/f:
V/f:
035 196
Fig. 3-134
035 197
Fig. 3-138
035 199
Fig. 3-135
035 182
Fig. 3-139
041 229
Block. tV/f> EXT

Block. replica EXT
Block. tV/f>> EXT
Reset replica EXT
Enabled
042 105
042 106
042 100
Fig. 3-128
042 101
Fig: 3-128,
3-131
Fig. 3-128
042 102
Fig: 3-129,
3-131
Fig. 3-131
042 115
042 123
042 131
042 108
Fig. 3-131
042 116
042 124
042 132
042 109
Fig. 3-131
042 117
042 125
042 133
042 110
Fig. 3-131
042 118
042 126
042 134
042 111
Fig. 3-131
042 119
042 127
042 135
V/f: Reset replica
035 184
V/f: Starting V/f>

V/f: tV/f> elapsed
V/f: Starting V/f(t)
041 230
Fig: 3-132,
3-134,3-135
3-138,3-139
Fig: 3-138,
3-139
Fig. 3-134
041 231
Fig. 3-134
041 232
V/f: Trip signal tV/f(t)
041 233
V/f: Starting V/f>>

V/f: tV/f>> elapsed
V/f: Buffer empty
041 234
Fig: 3-137,
3-138
Fig: 3-137,
3-138
Fig. 3-135
041 235
Fig. 3-135
041 236
Fig. 3-138
8-27

(continued)
Current Transformer
Supervision
CTS: Blocking EXT
036 160
Fig. 3-141
CTS: Reset latching EXT

CTS: Enabled
036 158
Fig. 3-145
036 080
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
Reset latching
Operated (updating)
Operated (latched)
Idiff>(CTS)active
Fig: 3-140,
3-141
036 159
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
CTS:
Alarm end a (updat.)

Alarm end b (updat.)
Alarm end c (updat.)
Alarm end d (updat.)
Alarm end a (latch.)
Alarm end b (latch.)
Alarm end c (latch.)
Alarm end d (latch.)
Alarm end a
036 081
CTS: Alarm end b

CTS: Alarm end c
CTS: Alarm end d
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCM_1: Blocking EXT
MCM_1: Enabled
8-28
036 099
Fig. 3-145
036 202
Fig. 3-145
036 203
Fig: 3-88,
3-145
Fig. 3-146
036 082
036 083
036 084
036 204
Fig. 3-146
036 206
036 208
036 210
036 205
Fig: 3-97,
3-146
036 207
036 209
036 211
036 213
Fig. 3-148
036 194
Fig: 3-147,
3-148
Fig: 3-53,
3-148,3-149
Fig. 3-148
MCM_1: Meas. circ. I faulty
036 198
MCM_1: Starting
MCM_2: Blocking EXT
MCM_2: Enabled
036 212
MCM_2: Starting
MCM_3: Blocking EXT
MCM_3: Enabled
036 214
MCM_3: Starting
MCM_4: Blocking EXT
MCM_4: Enabled
036 216
MCM_4: Starting
036 218
LIMIT: Enabled
040 074
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>

LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>>
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<<
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed
LIMIT: Starting T>
040 180
Fig: 3-150,
3-151
Fig. 3-150
040 181
Fig. 3-150
040 182
Fig. 3-150
040 183
Fig. 3-150
040 184
Fig. 3-150
040 185
Fig. 3-150
040 186
Fig. 3-150
040 187
Fig. 3-150
040 170
Fig. 3-151
036 215
036 195
036 199
Fig: 3-53,
3-149
036 217
036 196
036 200
Fig: 3-53,
3-149
036 219
036 197
036 201
Fig:
3-53,3-149

(continued)

1 to 3
Logic
LIMIT: Starting T>>

LIMIT: tT> elapsed
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed
LIMIT: Starting T<
LIMIT: Starting T<<
LIMIT: tT< elapsed
LIMIT: tT<< elapsed
040 171
Fig. 3-151
040 172
Fig. 3-151
040 173
Fig. 3-151
040 174
Fig. 3-151
040 175
Fig. 3-151
040 176
Fig. 3-151
040 177
Fig. 3-151
LIM_1: Enabled
040 123
Fig. 3-153
LIM_1: tI> elapsed

LIM_1: tI>> elapsed
LIM_1: tI< elapsed
LIM_1: tI<< elapsed
LIM_2: Enabled
LIM_2: tI> elapsed
LIM_2: tI>> elapsed
LIM_2: tI< elapsed
LIM_2: tI<< elapsed
LIM_3: Enabled
LIM_3: tI> elapsed
LIM_3: tI>> elapsed
LIM_3: tI< elapsed
LIM_3: tI<< elapsed
040 122
Fig. 3-153
037 201
Fig. 3-153
037 202
Fig. 3-153
037 203
Fig. 3-153
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT
LOGIC: Input 3 EXT
LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
LOGIC: Input 5 EXT
LOGIC: Input 6 EXT
LOGIC: Input 7 EXT
LOGIC: Input 8 EXT
LOGIC: Input 9 EXT
LOGIC: Input 10 EXT
LOGIC: Input 11 EXT
LOGIC: Input 12 EXT
LOGIC: Input 13 EXT
LOGIC: Input 14 EXT
LOGIC: Input 15 EXT
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT
LOGIC: Input 17 EXT
LOGIC: Input 18 EXT
LOGIC: Input 19 EXT
LOGIC: Input 20 EXT
LOGIC: Input 21 EXT
LOGIC: Input 22 EXT
LOGIC: Input 23 EXT
LOGIC: Input 24 EXT
LOGIC: Input 25 EXT
LOGIC: Input 26 EXT
LOGIC: Input 27 EXT
034 000
040 125
040 124
038 201
038 202
038 203
040 127
040 126
039 201
039 202
039 203
Fig. 3-155
034 001
034 002
034 003
034 004
034 005
034 006
034 007
034 008
034 009
034 010
034 011
034 012
034 013
034 014
034 015
034 086
034 087
034 088
034 089
034 090
034 091
034 092
034 093
034 094
034 095
034 096
8-29

(continued)
8-30
LOGIC: Input 28 EXT

LOGIC: Input 29 EXT
LOGIC: Input 30 EXT
LOGIC: Input 31 EXT
LOGIC: Input 32 EXT
LOGIC: Input 33 EXT
LOGIC: Input 34 EXT
LOGIC: Input 35 EXT
LOGIC: Input 36 EXT
LOGIC: Input 37 EXT
LOGIC: Input 38 EXT
LOGIC: Input 39 EXT
LOGIC: Input 40 EXT
LOGIC: Set 1 EXT
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT
LOGIC: Set 3 EXT
LOGIC: Set 4 EXT
LOGIC: Set 5 EXT
LOGIC: Set 6 EXT
LOGIC: Set 7 EXT
LOGIC: Set 8 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT
LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT
LOGIC: 1 has been set
LOGIC: 1 set externally
034 097

LOGIC: Enabled
LOGIC: Output 1
034 076
LOGIC: Output 1 (t)
042 033
LOGIC: Output 2
LOGIC: Output 2 (t)
042 034
034 098
034 099
034 100
034 101
034 102
034 103
034 104
034 105
034 106
034 107
034 108
034 109
Fig. 3-155
034 051
Fig. 3-154
034 052
034 053
034 054
034 055
034 056
034 057
034 058
034 059
Fig. 3-154
034 060
034 061
034 062
034 063
034 064
034 065
034 066
034 067
Fig. 3-154
034 068
034 069
034 070
034 071
034 072
034 073
034 074
Fig. 3-155
034 075
Fig: 3-154,
3-155
034 077
034 078
034 079
034 080
034 081
034 082
Fig. 3-155
034 046
Fig. 3-155
042 032
Fig: 3-155,
3-161
Fig: 3-155,
3-161
042 035

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 3
LOGIC: Output 3 (t)
LOGIC: Output 4
LOGIC: Output 4 (t)
LOGIC: Output 5
LOGIC: Output 5 (t)
LOGIC: Output 6
LOGIC: Output 6 (t)
LOGIC: Output 7
LOGIC: Output 7 (t)
LOGIC: Output 8
LOGIC: Output 8 (t)
LOGIC: Output 9
LOGIC: Output 9 (t)
LOGIC: Output 10
LOGIC: Output 10 (t)
LOGIC: Output 11
LOGIC: Output 12
LOGIC: Output 13
LOGIC: Output 14
LOGIC: Output 15
LOGIC: Output 16
LOGIC: Output 17
LOGIC: Output 18
LOGIC: Output 19
LOGIC: Output 20
LOGIC: Output 21
LOGIC: Output 22
LOGIC: Output 23
LOGIC: Output 24
LOGIC: Output 25
LOGIC: Output 26
LOGIC: Output 27
LOGIC: Output 28
042 036
042 037
042 038
042 039
042 040
042 041
042 042
042 043
042 044
042 045
042 046
042 047
042 048
042 049
042 050
042 051
042 052
042 053
042 054
042 055
042 056
042 057
042 058
042 059
042 060
042 061
042 062
042 063
042 064
042 065
042 066
042 067
042 068
042 069
042 070
042 071
042 072
042 073
042 074
042 075
042 076
042 077
042 078
042 079
042 080
042 081
042 082
042 083
042 084
042 085
042 086
042 087
8-31

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 29
LOGIC: Output 30
LOGIC: Output 31
LOGIC: Output 32
8-32
042 088
042 089
042 090
042 091
042 092
042 093
042 094
042 095

(continued)
8.1.2
Control and Testing
Local control panel
LOC: Param. change enabl.

Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
003 010
COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test
Signal selection for testing purposes.
003 180
Fig. 3-13
COMM1: Test spont.sig.start

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
003 184
Fig. 3-13
COMM1: Test spont.sig. end

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
003 186
Fig. 3-13
COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test
Signal selection for testing purposes.
103 180
Fig. 3-15
COMM2: Test spont.sig.start

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
COMM2: Test spont.sig. end
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
103 184
Fig. 3-15
103 186
Fig. 3-15
GSSE: Reset statistics
105 171

Status Events
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.

105 160
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
105 161
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to
32).
GSSE: Tx message counter

Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by
GSSE: Reset counters.
105 162
105 163
GSSE: Rx message counter
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by
105 164
GSSE: No. bin.state chang.
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by
105 165
GSSE: Tx last sequence
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent
with each GSSE.
105 166
GSSE: Tx last message
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
8-33

(continued)
105 167
GSSE: No. reject. messages
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible
message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
105 170
GSSE: IED view selection
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED receiv. messages

Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.
105 172
105 173
GSSE: IED Rx last sequence
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
105 174
GSSE: IED Rx last message
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
105 175
GSSE: IED missed messages
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence
numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED missed changes

Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence
numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
105 176
105 177
GSSE: IED time-outs
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
8-34

(continued)
Binary outputs
OUTP: Reset latch. USER

Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.
021 009
Fig. 3-25
OUTP: Relay assign. f.test

Selection of an output relay to be tested.
003 042
Fig. 3-26
003 043 Fig. 3-26

OUTP: Relay test
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OU T P: Ho ld t i m e f o r tes t).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
The test can only be carried out when protection is disabled.
OUTP: Hold-time for test
Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered
during functional testing.
003 044
Fig. 3-26
MEASO: Reset output USER

Resetting the measured data output function.
037 116
Fig. 3-29
Main function
MAIN: General reset
003 002
Fig: 3-2,
3-3,3-4,
3-25,3-29,
-34,3-41,
3-56,3-58,
3-60, 3-65,
3-67,3-68,
3-69,3-70,
3-71,3-72,
3-73,3-74,
3-75,3-76,
3-77,3-78,
3-105,
3-117,3-145
Reset of the following memories:

All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
021 010
Fig: 3-29,
3-60
Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators
Fault data
8-35

(continued)
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER

Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
021 005
MAIN: Reset c. cl./trip c.

The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
003 007
MAIN: Reset IP,max,stored
003 033
Fig. 3-57
Fig: 3-40,
3-41
The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current, ends a to d, are
reset.
003 040 Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting
is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).
Note:
The command is only executed if the manual trip command is included in
the configuration of trip commands.
003 039
MAIN: Warm restart
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
000 085
MAIN: Cold restart
A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section
entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. Values that a
device utilizes after a cold restart has occurred are designated "default
settings". They are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart.
100 001 Fig. 3-65

OP_RC: Reset recording
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
MT_RC: Reset recording

Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
003 008
Fig. 3-66
Overload Recording
OL_RC: Reset recording
100 003
Fig: 3-4,
3-67,3-68,
3-69,3-70
Reset of the overload memory.
8-36

(continued)
Fault Recording
003 041 Fig. 3-76

FT_RC: Trigger USER
Fault recording and fault value recording are enabled from the local control
panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset recording
003 006
Fig: 3-2,
3-3,3-76,
3-77,3-78
Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
039 120 Fig. 3-124
Thermal Overload Protection THRM1: Reset replica USER
039 180
THRM2: Reset replica USER
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Protection
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
003 080
Page: 3-201
Resetting the measured event values f<> : m a x. fre qu . for f> and
f < > : m in . f r e qu . for f< .
V/f: Reset replica USER
035 183
Fig. 3-139
Current Transformer
Supervision
CTS: Reset latch. USER
036 157
Fig. 3-145
Logic
LOGIC: Trigger 1
LOGIC: Trigger 2
LOGIC: Trigger 3
LOGIC: Trigger 4
LOGIC: Trigger 5
LOGIC: Trigger 6
LOGIC: Trigger 7
LOGIC: Trigger 8
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
034 038
Fig. 3-155
8.1.3
034 039
034 040
034 041
034 042
034 043
034 044
034 045
Fig. 3-155
OP_RC: Operat. data record.

Point of entry into the operating data log.
003 024
Fig. 3-65
MT_RC: Mon. signal record.

Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
003 001
Fig. 3-66
8-37

(continued)
8.2
8.2.1
Events
Event Counters
MAIN: No. general start.

Number of general starting signals.
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1
Number of general trip commands 1.
004 000
Fig. 3-56
004 006
Fig. 3-58

009 050
Fig. 3-58

009 056
Fig. 3-58
009 057
Fig. 3-58
OP_RC: No. oper. data sig.

Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
100 002
Fig. 3-65
MT_RC: No. monit. signals

Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
004 019
Fig. 3-66
Overload Recording
OL_RC: No. overload

Number of overload events.
004 101
Fig. 3-69
Fault Recording
FT_RC: No. of faults

Number of faults.
004 020
Fig. 3-3
FT_RC: No. system disturb.

Number of system disturbances.
004 010
Fig. 3-3
DTOC1: No. general start.
009 150
Fig. 3-105

009 160
IDMT1: No. general start.
009 151

009 161
Main function
protection
Protection
8-38
009 170
Fig. 3-117
009 171

(continued)
8.2.2
Measured Event Data
OL_DA: Overload duration

Duration of the overload event.
004 102
Fig. 3-67
004 155 Fig. 3-68

OL_DA: Status THRM1 replica
004 185
OL_DA: Status THRM2 replica
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function,
THRM1 or THRM2.
004 159 Fig. 3-68
OL_DA: Load current THRM1
004 189
OL_DA: Load current THRM2
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function,
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, to calculate the tripping time.
004 156 Fig. 3-68
OL_DA: Object temp. THRM1
004 186
OL_DA: Object temp. THRM2
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
004 157 Fig. 3-68
OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM1
004 187
OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM2
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object. Depending on
the setting at T HRM 1 : Se lec t C T A or THR M2 : Se lec t C TA for
coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be
displayed:
Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value.
Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the
Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via
the 20 mA input.
004 158 Fig. 3-68
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1
004 188
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM2
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection
function will reach the trip threshold.
004 191 Fig. 3-68
OL_DA: Offset THRM1 replica
004 192
OL_DA: Offset THRM2 replica
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into
account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
Fault Data Acquisition
FT_DA: Fault duration

Display of the fault duration.
008 010
Fig. 3-71
FT_DA: Running time

Display of the running time.
FT_DA: Fault determ. with
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
004 021
Fig. 3-71
004 198
Fig. 3-72
004 199 Fig. 3-72

FT_DA: Run time to meas.
This display indicates the difference in time between the start of the fault
and the fault data acquisition time.
8-39

(continued)
025 086 Fig. 3-73

FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,a p.u.
026 086 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,b p.u.
027 086 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,c p.u.
028 086 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,d p.u.
Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end a, b,
c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
025 087 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,a p.u.
026 087 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,b p.u.
027 087 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,c p.u.
028 087 Fig. 3-73
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,d p.u
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition
time, end a, b, c or d, respectively, referred to Inom.
FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,a p.u.

FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,b p.u.
FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,c p.u.
025 088
Fig. 3-73
026 088
Fig. 3-73
027 088
Fig. 3-73
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to Inom measured by the

P63x at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers and at the time at which
acquisition of fault data takes place.
FT_DA: Diff. current 1
Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3,
005 082
Fig. 3-74
006 082
Fig. 3-74
007 082
Fig. 3-74
005 084 Fig. 3-74

FT_DA: Diff.current 1(2*f0)
006 084 Fig. 3-74
007 084 Fig. 3-74
Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current for
measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.

Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current for
measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
005 085
Fig. 3-74
006 085
Fig. 3-74
007 085
Fig. 3-74
FT_DA: Restrain. current 1

Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3,
005 083
Fig. 3-74
006 083
Fig. 3-74
007 083
Fig. 3-74
025 082 Fig. 3-75

FT_DA: Diff. current REF_1
026 082 Fig. 3-75
027 082 Fig. 3-75
Display of the differential current, determined by the ground differential
protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to Iref.
025 083 Fig. 3-75
FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_1
026 083 Fig. 3-75
027 083 Fig. 3-75
Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential
protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to Iref.
8-40

(continued)
Protection
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
005 002
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.

f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
005 001
8-41

(continued)
8.2.3
Overload Recording
Fault Recording
8-42
Event Recording
OL_RC: Overload recording 1

Point of entry into the overload log.
033 020
Fig. 3-70
033 021
Fig. 3-70
033 022
Fig. 3-70
033 023
Fig. 3-70
033 024
Fig. 3-70
033 025
Fig. 3-70
033 026
Fig. 3-70
033 027
Fig. 3-70
FT_RC: Fault recording 1

Point of entry into the fault log.
003 000
Fig. 3-77
033 001
Fig. 3-77
033 002
Fig. 3-77
033 003
Fig. 3-77
033 004
Fig. 3-77
033 005
Fig. 3-77
033 006
Fig. 3-77
033 007
Fig. 3-77
9 Commissioning
9
9.1
Commissioning
Safety Instructions
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as
the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor
must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is required for
proper operation of the unit. The cross-section of this ground conductor must also
conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is
required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected,
always disconnect the device from the supply.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened!
If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting
voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
In units with pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for connection to the
current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current
transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
9-1
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
9-2
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that
is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed
connecting cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data')
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a
functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device
startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2
Preparation
Commissioning Tests
After the P63x has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup
tests are carried out (see Chapter 3, Self-Monitoring). The LED indicators for
Operation (H1) and Blocked/Faulty (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the
P63x is ready for operation. This is recognized when the text 'P63x' is shown in the first
line on the LCD screen.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Chapter 6, Enabling
Parameter Changes), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings
from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
9-3
9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P63x
and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the
integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID/ folder:
Par/Conf/ folder:
PC: Name of manufacturer
PC: Bay address
PC: Device address
PC: Baud rate
PC: Parity bit
COMM1: Baud rate
COMM1: Parity bit
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
COMM2: Baud rate
COMM2: Parity bit
Par/Func/Glob/ folder:
PC: Command blocking
PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
C O M M 1 : Sig./meas.block.USER
C O M M 2 : Sig./meas.block.USER
Further instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.

Note:
9-4
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication

protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
9 Commissioning
(continued)
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out once
again before blocking is cancelled:
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob/ folder):
Testing
M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d 'Yes (on)'
By using the signals and displays generated by the P63x, it is possible to determine
whether the P63x is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing, the trip
commands can be blocked at M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R ('Par/Func/Glob'
folder) or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is
desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for a set time through M AIN : M a n . tr i p
c m d . U SER (Oper/CtrlTest folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Selection of the trip command from the integrated local control panel is passwordprotected (see Chapter 6, "Password-Protected Control Operations").
Note:
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included
in the selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
If the P63x is connected to a control station, the user is advised to activate the test mode
via M A I N : T e s t m o d e USER ("Par/Func/Glob/" folder) or an appropriately configured
binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (cause of
transmission: test mode).
9-5
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary

signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal ("Oper/Cycl/Phys" folder), it is possible to

determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the P63x.
The values displayed have the following meanings:
'Low': Not energized.
'High': Energized.
'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays
Checking the protection

function
9-6
It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P: H o l d - ti m e fo r te s t in Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P: R e l a y a s s i g n . f. te s t, Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
The output relay to be tested can only be selected if the device has been set to 'off-line'
at M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder). Test triggering then
occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
It is password-protected (see Chapter 6, Password-Protected Control Operations).
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P63x, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t
(Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking differential
protection
For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the tripping
characteristic of the P63x so that the basic threshold value is always checked.
The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feed is calculated as follows:
I=
Idiff > Inom,z

k am,z
z:
Idiff>:
Inom,z:
kam,z:
transformer end a, b, c or d
Set operate value
nominal current of the P63x for transformer end a, b, c or d
amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d
For single-side one-phase or two-phase feed, a vector group-matching factor in

accordance with the set vector group ID needs to be taken into account in addition to the
amplitude-matching factor. The vector group-matching factors are given in the tables
below (page after next) and the threshold current is calculated as follows:
I
Idiff > Inom,z

k am,z k s,y,z
z:
Idiff>:
Inom,z:
kam,z:
k s,y ,z :
Set operate value
nominal current of the P63x for transformer end a, b, c or d
vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
9-7
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed as measured
operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P63x to the system
current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID are correct.. The tables
below (next page) give the factors ks which serve to calculate the differential current for
single-side feed. The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented,
however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user.
Id,y = k am,z k s,y,z Itest,x
x:
z:
y:
Id,y :
phase A, B or C
measuring system 1, 2 or 3
differential current as displayed
kam,z:
k s,y ,z :
Itest,x:

vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
test current phase A, B or C
In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P63x will trip as follows, if a
value of Idiff>> or Idiff>>> is exceeded.
9-8
Idiff>> exceeded:
Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint
Idiff>>> exceeded:
Trip regardless of the restraining current and regardless of all

other restraints.
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, zero sequence-filtered

Transformer end
Vector group ID
b, c or d
0=12
10
11
DIFF: Diff Current 1
0.67 0.67
0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58
0.33 0.33
0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58
0.33 0.33
0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00
Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, zero sequence-filtered

Transformer end
Vector group ID
b, c or d
0=12
10
11
0.00 0.00
0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58
1.00 1.00
1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58
1.00 1.00
0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15
Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, not zero sequence-filtered

Transformer end
Vector group ID
b, c or d
0=12
10
1.00 1.00
0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00
0.00 0.00
1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00
Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, not zero sequence-filtered
Transformer end
Vector group ID
b, c or d
0=12
10
0.00 0.00
1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00
1.00 1.00
1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00
1.00 1.00
0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
9-9
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The connection of the phase currents can be checked using the phase angles provided
as measured operating data by the P63x.
If the phase currents are connected correctly and there is an ideal balanced load on the
transformer, the phase angles between the phase currents of any one transformer end
are displayed as follows:
Phase sequence A-B-C
Phase sequence A-C-B
AB,z = BC,z = CA,z = 120
AB,z = BC, z = CA, z = 120
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase sequence.
9-10
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The phase angle between the phase currents of two transformer ends for a particular
phase is a function of the vector group of the transformer. This phase angle should be
displayed as follows:
Vector group
0 = 12
x ,A z = 180
x ,A z = 150
x ,A z = 120
x,A z = 90
x,A z = 60
x,A z = 30
x,A z = 0
x,A z = 30
x,A z = 60
x,A z = 90
10
x ,A z = 120
11
x ,A z = 150
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase sequence.
Changing the setting for the connection scheme of an involved series transformer, on the
other hand, will change the measured operating data value by 180.
9-11
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking ground
differential protection
The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feed, neutral-point side, is
calculated as follows:
I
Idiff > Inom

k am,z
z:
Idiff>:
Inom:
kam,z:
set operate value
nominal current of the P63x
There will be no trip for single-side, single-pole, phase-side feed.

The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed. The display
of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum
thresholds that can be set by the user.
Completion of
commissioning
Before the P63x is released for operation, the user should make sure that the following
steps have been taken:
All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in Oper/CtrlTest/ folder.)
Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting No.)
Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting No.)
The device is on-line.
(M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting Yes (on).)
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling Operation
(H1) should be on.
9-12
10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P63x to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled Unpacking and Packing in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.

Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P63x is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P63x from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC:
VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC:
Type M3.5
Type M2
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P63x issues an Alarm signal on LED H3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the
section entitled Monitoring Signal Memory Readout in Chapter 6). The table below
lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P63x
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.
Self-Monitoring
SFMON: Warning (LED)

Warning configured for LED H3.
036 070

Warning configured for an output relay.
036 100
Key:
-:
No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes:
The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating:
The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . f a u l t .
2)
The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
093 024
SFMON: Cold restart
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay:
Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
093 025
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
090 019
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:

Updating / Updating
10-2
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Multiple signal: output relay defective.
041 200
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / 'Warning' output relay:

Updating / Updating
Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail.
The hardware clock has failed.
093 040

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: Battery failure
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
090 010

Updating / Updating
-/SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
096 121
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
093 081
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
093 082
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: -15V supply faulty
The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 080
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
10-3
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Module in wrong slot.
096 100
096 101
096 102
096 103
096 104
096 105
096 106
096 107
096 108
096 109
096 110
096 111
096 112
096 113
096 114
096 115
096 116
096 117
096 118
096 119
096 120
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
10-4
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Defective module in slot x.
097 000
097 001
097 002
097 003
097 004
097 005
097 006
097 007
097 008
097 009
097 010
097 011
097 012
097 013
097 014
097 015
097 016
097 017
097 018
097 019
097 020

Updating / Updating
Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only
detected during device startup.
093 070

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: Module A RAM faulty
RAM fault on communication module A.
093 071

Yes / Yes
-/093 110
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module.
093 111

Yes / Yes
-/P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
10-5
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Error K 701

SFMON: Error K 702
SFMON: Error K 703
SFMON: Error K 704
SFMON: Error K 705
SFMON: Error K 706
SFMON: Error K 707
SFMON: Error K 708
SFMON: Error K 801
SFMON: Error K 802
SFMON: Error K 901
SFMON: Error K 902
SFMON: Error K 903
SFMON: Error K 904
SFMON: Error K 905
SFMON: Error K 906
SFMON: Error K 907
SFMON: Error K 908
SFMON: Error K 1001
SFMON: Error K 1002
SFMON: Error K 1003
SFMON: Error K 1004
SFMON: Error K 1005
SFMON: Error K 1006
SFMON: Error K 1007
SFMON: Error K 1008
SFMON: Error K 1201
SFMON: Error K 1202
SFMON: Error K 1601
SFMON: Error K 1602
SFMON: Error K 1603
SFMON: Error K 1604
SFMON: Error K 1605
SFMON: Error K 1606
SFMON: Error K 1607
SFMON: Error K 1608
SFMON: Error K 1801
SFMON: Error K 1802
SFMON: Error K 1803
SFMON: Error K 1804
SFMON: Error K 1805
SFMON: Error K 1806
SFMON: Error K 2001
SFMON: Error K 2002
SFMON: Error K 2003
SFMON: Error K 2004
SFMON: Error K 2005
SFMON: Error K 2006
SFMON: Error K 2007
SFMON: Error K 2008
10-6
097 078
097 079
097 080
097 081
097 082
097 083
097 084
097 085
097 086
097 087
097 094
097 095
097 096
097 097
097 098
097 099
097 100
097 101
097 102
097 103
097 104
097 105
097 106
097 107
097 108
097 109
097 118
097 119
097 150
097 151
097 152
097 153
097 154
097 155
097 156
097 157
097 166
097 167
097 168
097 169
097 170
097 171
097 182
097 183
097 184
097 185
097 186
097 187
097 188
097 189
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Output relay K xxx defective.

Updating / Updating
Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Undef. operat. code
Undefined operation code.
093 010
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op.
Invalid arithmetic operation.
093 011
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Undefined interrupt
Undefined interrupt.
093 012
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Exception oper.syst.
Interrupt of the operating system.
093 013
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Protection failure
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has
detected an error.
090 021
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Checksum error param
A checksum error involving the settings in the memory (NOVRAM) has
been detected.
090 003
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
093 041
SFMON: Clock sync. error
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between
the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

Yes / Yes
-/-
10-7
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
093 026
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module
(digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is
detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are
deleted.
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
090 012

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block.
Software overloaded.
093 015

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: Inval. SW vers.comm.
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
093 075

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: M.c.b. trip V
The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
098 000
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of Voltage and

Frequency protection functions.
10-8
Yes / Yes 2)
-/-
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
091 018
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the
current-measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON and CTS, measuringcircuit monitoring multiple signal.)

Yes / Yes 2)
-/091 026
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a
091 027
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b
091 028
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, c
091 029
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, d
The measuring-circuit monitoring function, associated with the respective
end, has detected a fault in the current-measuring circuits. (See functions
MCMON and CTS, monitoring of measuring circuits.)

Yes / Yes 2)
-/SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y
Incorrect or invalid software for analog module has been downloaded.
093 113

Yes / Yes
-/SFMON: Faulty DSP
The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error.
093 127
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP
Incorrect or invalid software has been downloaded for the DSP coprocessor.
093 128
Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
093 114
093 115
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

Yes / Yes 2)
-/093 116
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.

Yes / Yes 2)
-/P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610
10-9
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
098 024
SFMON: PT100 open circuit
The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer.

Yes / Yes 2)
-/SFMON: Overload 20 mA input
The 20 mA input of analog module Y is overloaded.
098 025

Yes / Yes 2)
-/098 026
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

Yes / Yes 2)
-/098 028
SFMON: Setting error f<>
The over-/ underfrequency protection function has been set to
'overfrequency' (by way of the settings for operate threshold and nominal
frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t operating
mode.

Yes / Yes 2)
-/091 007
SFMON: Iref, a inval. range
091 008
SFMON: Iref, b inval. range
091 009
SFMON: Iref, c inval. range
091 016
SFMON: Iref, d inval. rang
The reference current determined by the P63x for differential protection is
not within the permissible range.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Protection is blocked.

Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
SFMON: Matching fail. end a
SFMON: Matching fail. end b
SFMON: Matching fail. end c
SFMON: Matching fail. end d
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection
function is above the permissible range.
091 000
091 001
091 002
091 017

Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
10-10
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
091 006
SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv.
The second highest amplitude matching factor for differential protection is
smaller than permitted.

Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
The reference current determined by the P63x for ground differential
protection is not within the permissible range.
091 105
091 115
091 125

Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the ground differential
protection function is above the permissible range.
091 101
091 111
091 121
091 102
091 112
091 122

Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
091 104
091 114
091 124
The lowest amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is
lower than permitted.

Yes / Yes
Yes / Yes
10-11
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
098 036
098 037

Yes / Yes 2)
-/SFMON: Setting error THRM1
The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum
permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value.
This setting is not valid.
098 038
098 039
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload

protection
Updating / Updating
-/093 120
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync
The M AIN : M i n - p u l s e c l o c k EXT function has been configured to a
binary input of analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Clock synchronization failure.

Yes / Yes 2)
-/098 053
SFMON: Output 30
098 054
098 055
SFMON: Output 31
098 056
098 057
SFMON: Output 32
098 058
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by
selection at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals
are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.
Yes / Yes
-/-
10-12
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
The P63x is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55C or 131F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the
operating temperatures are approx. +45C inside the devices, the required maintenance
interval can be increased by about 1 year.
The P63x is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few A during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible
without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
11-1
11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note:
Only Schneider Electric-approved components may be used

(see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1
11-2
Component drawing for power supply module V.
11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and
the battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Note:
The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be

disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
11-3
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing
The P63x is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years 4 years at the maximum.
The P63x incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of sub-functions that cannot be checked by the selfmonitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits
The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring
function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the devices general
functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from
the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (i.e. 0.5 Inom) and a "large"
measured value (i.e. 4 Inom) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D
converter. This makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating
device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
The dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since only the stability of a few passive
components is checked. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
Additional analog testing is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is
completely numerical and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values.
Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing. Proper operation was
checked in conjunction with type testing.
11-4
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Binary opto inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (Oper/Cycl/Phys folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even twophase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for
the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by
way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
Serial Interfaces
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also

includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
11-5
11-6
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see chapter
entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither
condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P63x for approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is
used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the
processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges rapidly.
In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the power
supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents of the
event memory should be previously read out and stored separately.
12-1
12-2
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts

The P63x is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. User-specific
labeling for non-standard configurations of the LEDs can be printed on the blank label
strips packed with the device. The label strips should then be affixed to the local control
panel on the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using an overhead projector pen with water-resistant ink
('Stabilo' type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description
Order No.
Cable bushings
88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V

Electrolytic capacitor 100 F, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5-250V
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250V
Connecting parts & fasteners
(to assemble flush-mounted cases to form a
mounting rack)
88512-4-9650539-302
Empty subrack 40 T
88512-4-9650535-302
Cover frame 40 T
88512-4-9650545-302
Cover frame 84 T
88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows
On request (MiCOM S1)
13-1
13-2
14 Order Information
14
Order Information
14.1 Order Information for P631 in 40TE case

MiCOM P631
Name
Order number
PCS Cell No.
1234
Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot.
P631- N N
N N N N
P631-
9 10 11
-305
12, 13
14
15
16
17
18
AA
-4xx
-610
-46x
-9x x -95 x
-8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection,
-403
Basic device 40TE, ring-terminal connection,
-404
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays

Mounting option and display:
Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display
Processor extension and Current transformer:

With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23)
2) 12)
2)
8
9
Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor

VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant)
Without order extension no.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)

>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
-461
8)
-462
8)
-463
8)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
-464
8)
With communication / information interface:

Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
-90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
-91
Protocol can be switched between:
-92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier

and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector

Protocol IEC61850
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45
4
-94
6

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45

Language:
English (German)
German (English)
French (English)
-801
4)
4)
4)
Russian (English)
-800
4)
4)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
4)
Px40 English (English)
4) 7)
Not yet available - on request
-802
-803
-804
-805
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
12) Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) requires DSP-Coprocessor
14-1
(continued)

MiCOM P632
Name
Order number
PCS Cell No.
1234
P632- N N
N N N N
P632-
9 10 11
-305
12, 13
14
15
16
17
18
AA
-4xx
-610
-46x
-9x x -95 x
-8xx
Basic device:
-403
-404


Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24)
2) 12)
2)
8
9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole)
Additional binary I/O options:

Without
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)

VA,nom = 24 VDC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC

Further add. options:

Without
With analog module
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)

>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)

>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
-461
8)
-462
8)
-463
8)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
-464
8)

-90 0
-91
-92


Protocol IEC61850
4
-94
6


Language:
English (German)
German (English)
French (English)
-800
4)
-801
4)
4)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
4)
4)
4)
Russian (English)
4) 7)
-802
-803
-804
-805

14-2
(continued)
14.3 Order Information for P633 in 40TE or 84TE case

MiCOM P633
Name
Order number
PCS Cell No.
1234
Three Winding Transformer Diff. Prot.
P633- N N
N N N N
Three Winding Transformer Diff. Prot.
P633-
9 10 11
-305
12, 13
14
15
16
17
18
AA
-4xx
-610
-46x
-9x x -95 x
-8xx
Basic device:
-404
-405
-406


Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34)
2) 12)
2)
8
9
9
2)
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole)

Without
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays)

VA,nom = 24 VDC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC


Without
With analog module
With analog and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)

>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)

>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
-461
8)
-462
8)
-463
8)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
-464
8)

-90 0
-91
-92


Protocol IEC61850
4
-94
6

Language:
English (German)
German (English)
French (English)
-801
4)
4)
4)
Russian (English)
-800
4)
4)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
4)
4) 7)
-802
-803
-804
-805

14-3
(continued)

MiCOM P634
Name
Order number
PCS Cell No.
1234
Four Winding Transformer Diff. Prot.
P634- N N
N N N N
Four Winding Transformer Diff. Prot.
P634-
9 10 11
-305
12, 13
14
15
16
17
18
AA
-4xx
-610
-46x
-9x x -95 x
-8xx
Basic device:
-403
-404


Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24)
2)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34 / T41...43)
2)
2) 12)
8
9
9
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole)

Without

VA,nom = 24 VDC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC


Without
With analog module
With analog and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)

>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)

>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
-461
8)
-462
8)
-463
8)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
-464
8)

-90 0
-91
-92


Protocol IEC61850
4
-94
6


Language:
English (German)
German (English)
French (English)
-800
4)
-801
4)
4)
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
4)
4)
4)
Russian (English)
4) 7)
-802
-803
-804
-805

14-4
(continued)
Information about Ordering Options

Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number
(-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic
characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be
available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra
characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English"
ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data
models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for
applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-5
14-6
Appendix
A Glossary
B Signal List
C Terminal Connection Diagrams
D Overview of Changes
AN-1
Appendix
(continued)
A
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Glossary
Function Groups
Modules
Symbols
Examples of Signal Names
Symbols used
B
B1
B2
List of Signals
Internal Signal Names
Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or
IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
Interoperability
Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Application Layer
Basic Application Functions
B 2.1
B 2.1.1
B 2.1.2
B 2.1.3
B 2.1.4
B 2.1.5
B3
B 3.1
B 3.1.1
B 3.1.1.1
B 3.1.1.2
B 3.1.1.3
B 3.1.2
B 3.1.3
B 3.1.3.1
B 3.1.3.2
B 3.1.3.3
B 3.1.3.3.1
B 3.1.3.3.2
B 3.1.3.3.3
B 3.1.3.3.4
B 3.1.3.3.5
B 3.1.3.3.6
B 3.1.3.3.7
B 3.1.3.3.8
B 3.1.3.4
B 3.1.3.4.1
B 3.1.3.4.2
B 3.1.3.4.3
B 3.1.3.5
B 3.1.3.6
AN-2
Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103

Interoperability
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface
Optical Interface
Transmission Rate
Link Layer
Application Layer
Transmission Mode for Application Data
Common Address of ASDU
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor
Direction
System Functions in Monitor Direction
Status Indications in Monitor Direction
Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor
Direction
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction
Measured values in Monitor Direction
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control
Direction
System Functions in Control Direction
General Commands in Control Direction
Generic Functions in Control Direction
Miscellaneous
A-1
A-1
A-3
A-4
A-11
A-12
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-11
B-14
B-14
B-14
B-14
B-14
B-14
B-15
B-15
B-15
B-15
B-15
B-15
B-16
B-17
B-18
B-19
B-20
B-20
B-22
B-23
B-23
B-23
B-24
B-25
B-25
Appendix
(continued)
C
C1
C 1.1
C 1.2
C2
C 2-1
C 2.2
C3
C 3.1
C 3.2
C 3.3
C4
C 4.1
C 4.2
C5
Terminal Connection Diagrams

Location diagram for P631 in 40TE case
40 T case, pin-terminal connection
40 T case, ring-terminal connection
Location diagram for P633 in 40TE or 84TE case
Ethernet Module
P63x - Overview of Changes
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-4
C-7
C-7
C-13
C-19
C-19
C-24
C-30
C-36
C-36
C-42
C-48
D-1
AN-3
AN-4
Appendix A - Glossary
A1
Function Groups
P631 P632 P633 P634
COMM1: Communication interface 1

COMM2: Communication interface 2
(as of P63x version 602)
CTS:
Current transformer supervision
(as of P63x version -606)
DIFF:
DTOC1: Definite-time overcurrent protection 1
DTOC2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2
DTOC3: Definite-time overcurrent protection 3
DVICE: Device
f<>:
Over-/Underfrequency Protection
FT_DA: Fault Data Acquisition
FT_RC: Fault Recording
GOOSE: Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
GSSE: IEC Generic Substation Status Events
IDMT1: Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1
IEC:
INP:
Binary input
IRIGB:
IRIG-B interface
LED:
LED indicators
LIM_1: Limit value monitoring 1
LIMIT:
LOC:
Local control panel
LOGIC: Logic
MAIN:
Main function
MCM_1: Measuring-circuit monitoring MCM_1
MEASI: Measured Data Input
MEASO: Measured Data Output
MT_RC: Monitoring Signal Recording
OL_DA: Overload Data Acquisition
OL_RC: Overload Recording
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
A-1
(continued)
P631 P632 P633 P634

OP_RC:
OUTP:
PC:
PSS:
REF_1:
REF_2:
REF_3:
SFMON:
THRM1:
THRM2:
UCA2:
V/f:
V<>:
A-2

Binary outputs
PC link
Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault
9
9
9
9
-
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Self-Monitoring
Thermal Overload Protection 1
Thermal Overload Protection 2
Utility Communication Architecture 2.0
(P63x versions 604/-605/-606 only)
Overfluxing Protection (as of P63x version -602)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
-
9
9
9
9
9
9
protection) 1
protection) 2
protection) 3
(continued)
A2
A:
B:
L:
P:
T:
V:
X:
Y:
Modules
Communication module
Digital bus module
MMI module
Processor module
Transformer module
Power supply module
Binary I/O module
Analog I/O module
A-3
(continued)
A3
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams

Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12:
modified 1991
Analog information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981;
To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been
used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom.
Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of
the signal flow, output signals on the right side.
Symbol
Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of
related elements, contours of the elements may be
joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose

common contour line is oriented in the signal flow
direction.
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations
with two or more signal flow directions, such as for
symbols with a control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements
whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the
signal flow direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination
and one or more qualifiers.
A-4
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to
several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of
several trigger elements, for example.
Output block
An output block contains an output function common
to several symbols.
MAIN: Inom Device

[ 010 003 ]
D5Z08X5B
MAIN: Inom Device

[ 010 003 ]
1.0
5.0
Settable control block

The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address
under which the function shown in the text is
implemented.
Settable control block with function blocks
The digits in the function block show the settings that
are possible for this function.
The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding
unit or meaning to each setting.
1.0: 1.0 A
5.0: 5.0 A
D5Z08X6B
A-5
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the
output.
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
Dynamic input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables
are 1.
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input
variable is 1.
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input
variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be
replaced by any other number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input
variable is 1.
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any
other number if the number of inputs is increased or
decreased accordingly.
A-6
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Delay element
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values
(in seconds or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable
changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for
100 ms, regardless of the duration of the input value
1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable
flip-flop is retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be
changed to any other duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary
signal.
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the
two input variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the
minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal
The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal
exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable
remains 1 until the input signal drops below the
threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
A-7
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse
sequence is generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse
sequence starts with the input variable transition
(synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse
sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the
input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is
also 1.
Band pass filter
The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of
the input signals. All other frequencies (above and
below 50 Hz) are attenuated.
Counter
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to
1 are counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable
from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive
in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter

with electrical isolation between input and output.
L+ = pos. voltage input
L- = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
A-8
(continued)
Symbol
Description
Input transformer
with phase and item identifiers
(according to DIN EN 60445)
Phase identifiers for current inputs:
for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Phase identifiers for voltage inputs
via transformer 1:
for A: 1U
for B: 1V
for C: 1W
for N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Item identifiers for current transformers:
for A: T1
for B: T2
for C: T3
for N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for A: T5
for B: T6
for C: T7
for N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with item identifier
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement
(closed-circuit operation).
A-9
(continued)
Symbol
Description
PC interface
with pin connections
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication
of the two input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of
the two input variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) are equal to the function in the function
block.
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
A-10
(continued)
A4
Examples of Signal Names
All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter 3 as follows:
Signal Name
Description
FT_RC: Fault recording n
Internal signal names are not coded by a data model

address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a
diamond. The small figure underneath the signal
name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are
listed in Appendix B.
DIST: VNG>> triggered

[ 036 015 ]
Signal names coded by a data model address are

represented by their address (shown in square
brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.
MAIN: General reset

[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its

signal name, address, and the setting preceded by
the setting arrow.
305 100
A-11
(continued)
A5
A-12
Symbols used
Symbol
Meaning
Time duration
Voltage, potential difference
Complex voltage
Electrical current
Complex current
Complex impedance
Modulus of complex impedance
Frequency
Temperature in C
Sum, result
Unit of electrical resistance
Angle
Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a

defined current and a defined voltage.
Time constant
Temperature difference in K
Appendix B - List of Signals
B 1 Internal Signal Names

Internal signal names are not coded by an external address.
In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond.
COMM1: Selected protocol
Fig. 3-6
CTS: Blocked
Fig. 3-141
CTS: End y faulty (y: a,b,c,d)
Fig. 3-143
CTS:Reset
Fig. 3-145
DIFF: Id,1
Fig. 3-87
DIFF: Id,2
Fig. 3-87
DIFF: Id,3
Fig. 3-87
DIFF: IR,1
Fig. 3-87
DIFF: IR,2
Fig. 3-87
DIFF: IR,3
Fig. 3-87
DIFF: I(2*f0),1
Fig. 3-89
DIFF: I(2*f0),2
Fig. 3-89
DIFF: I(2*f0),3
Fig. 3-89
DIFF: I(5*f0),1
Fig. 3-91
DIFF: I(5*f0),2
Fig. 3-91
DIFF: I(5*f0),3
Fig. 3-91
DIFF: Sound match
Fig. 3-80
f<>: No. periods reached
Fig. 3-129
FT_DA: Save measured values
Fig. 3-72
Ineg/Ipos>,y (y: a,b,c,d)
Fig. 3-142
Ineg/Ipos>>,y (y: a,b,c,d)
Fig. 3-142
Ipos>,y (y: a,b,c,d)
Fig. 3-142
LOGIC: Output n
Fig: 3-156, 3-157, 3-158, 3-159, 3-160
LOGIC: Output n (t)
Fig: 3-156, 3-157, 3-158, 3-159, 3-160
MAIN: Reset LED
Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Protection active
Fig. 3-50
MAIN: Time tag
Fig. 3-59
MEASO: Enable
Fig. 3-28
MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp.
Fig. 3-29
REF_1: Id,N,a
Fig. 3-97
REF_1: IR,N,a
Fig. 3-97
THRM1: Block. by CTA error
Fig. 3-122
THRM1: I
Fig. 3-123
THRM1: With CTA
Fig. 3-122
V/f: Enable meas.
Fig. 3-133
B-1

(continued)
B2
Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol
interface for substation control systems.
B 2.1
Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets
are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems.Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined
parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given
application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different
manufacturers, then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. 1
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific
parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured
values.
Note:
B 2.1.1
Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
Point-to-point configuration
Multiple point-to-point configuration
Multipoint-party line configuration

Multipoint-star configuration
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
B-2

(continued)
B 2.1.2
Physical Layer 1 (Network-Specific Parameters)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction) 2

Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced interface X.24/X.27
interface V.24/V.28
interface V.24/V.28
Standardized
Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s

100 bit/s
2,400 bit/s
2,400 bit/s
56,000 bit/s
200 bit/s
4,800 bit/s
4,800 bit/s
64,000 bit/s
300 bit/s
9,600 bit/s
9,600 bit/s
600 bit/s
19,200 bit/s
1,200 bit/s
38,400 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 3
1
2
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced interface X.24/X.27
interface V.24/V.28
interface V.24/V.28
Standardized
Recommended with > 1,200 bit/s

100 bit/s
2,400 bit/s
2,400 bit/s
56,000 bit/s
200 bit/s
4,800 bit/s
4,800 bit/s
64,000 bit/s
300 bit/s
9,600 bit/s
9,600 bit/s
600 bit/s
19,200 bit/s
1,200 bit/s
38,400 bit/s

The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.
B-3

(continued)
B 2.1.3
Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)1
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Link Transmission Procedure
Address Field of the Link
x Balanced transmission
x Not present
(balanced transmission only)
x Unbalanced transmission
x One octet
x Two octets 2
1
2
Frame Length
x Structured
240
x Unstructured
Maximum length L (number of octets)

Balanced only.
B-4

(continued)
B 2.1.4
Application Layer1
Transmission mode for application data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet
x Two octets
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)

x One octet
x Structured
x Two octets
x Unstructured
x Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet
x Two octets (with originator address)
B-5

(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs

Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x
<1>
Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_TA_1
<3>
Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
<4>
Double-point information with time tag
M_DP_TA_1
=
x
<5>
Step position information
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
Step position information with time tag
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
Bit string of 32 bit
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
Bit string of 32 bit with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
<9>
Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
<10>
Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_ME_TA_1
<11>
Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
Measured value, short floating point value
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
B-6

(continued)
<17>
Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
ME_EP_TB_1
<19>
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
Packed single-point information with status change detection
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
B-7

(continued)
Process Information in Monitor Direction 1 (Station-Specific Parameter)

x
<45>
Single command
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
Double command
C_DC_NA_1
<47>
Regulating step command
C_IT_NA_1
<48>
Set point command, normalized value
C_RC_NA_1
<49>
Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
<50>
Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NC_1
<51>
Bit string of 32 bit
C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

x
<70>
End of initialization
ME_EI_NA_1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.
B-8

(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
1
2
<100>
Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
Read command
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
Clock synchronization command 1
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
Test command
C_TS_NB_1
<105>
Reset process command
C_RP_NC_1
<106>
Delay acquisition command 2
C_CD_NA_1
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station.
B-9

(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

x
<110>
Parameter of measured value, normalized value
P_ME_NA_1
<111>
Parameter of measured value, scaled value
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
Parameter of measured value, short floating point value
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
Parameter activation
P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
B-10
<120>
File ready
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
Section ready
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1
<123>
Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
Segment
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
Directory
F_DR_TA_1

(continued)
B 2.1.5
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)

x
Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)

x
Global
Group 1
Group 7
Group 13
Group 2
Group 8
Group 14
Group 3
Group 9
Group 15
Group 4
Group 10
Group 16
Group 5
Group 11
Group 6
Group 12
Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)

x
Clock synchronization
B-11

(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)

x
Direct command transmission
Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission
Select and execute set point command
C_SE ACTTERM used

x
No additional definition
Short pulse duration
(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration
(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)
Counter request
General request counter
Counter freeze without reset
Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset
Counter reset
Addresses per group have to be specified
B-12

(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)

x
Threshold value
Smoothing value
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)

Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)

File transfer in monitor direction
F_FR_NA_1
File transfer in control direction
F_FR_NA_1
B-13

(continued)
B3
Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P63x.
B 3.1
Interoperability
B 3.1.1
Physical Layer
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface

x
EIA RS 485
No. of loads
32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed information
see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface
x
Glass fiber
Plastic fiber
F-SMA connector
BFOC/2.5 connector
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate

x
9,600 bit/s
19,200 bit/s
B-14

(continued)
B 3.1.2
Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.

B 3.1.3
Application Layer
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU
x
One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)

More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction

B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<0>
End of general interrogation
<0>
Time synchronization
<2>
Reset FCB
<3>
Reset CU
<4>
Start / restart
<5>
Power on
B-15

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction

Schneider Electric Designations
Address Description
INF
Description
<16>
Auto-recloser active
<17>
Teleprotection active
<18>
Protection active
003 030
<19>
LED reset
021 010
<20>
Blocking of monitor direction
037 075
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.
<21>
Test mode
037 071
MAIN: Test mode
<22>
Local parameter setting
<23>
Characteristic 1
036 090
PSS: PS 1 active
<24>
Characteristic 2
036 091
PSS: PS 2 active
<25>
Characteristic 3
036 092
PSS: PS 3 active
<26>
Characteristic 4
036 093
PSS: PS 4 active
<27>
Auxiliary input 1
034 000
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
<28>
Auxiliary input 2
034 001
LOGIC: Input 2 EXT
<29>
Auxiliary input 3
034 002
LOGIC: Input 3 EXT
<30>
Auxiliary input 4
034 003
LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
B-16

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<32>
Measured value supervision I
<33>
Measured value supervision V
<35>
Phase sequence supervision
<36>1
Trip circuit supervision
<37>
I>> back-up operation
<38>
VT fuse failure
<39>
Teleprotection disturbed
<46>
<47>

Address Description
041 200
004 061
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
Group warning
036 100
Group alarm
004 065
MAIN: Blocked/Faulty
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals.
B-17

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
B-18
INF
Description
<48>
Ground fault L1
<49>
Ground fault L2
<50>
Ground fault L3
<51>
Earth fault forward, i.e. line
<52>
Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar

Address Description

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<64>
Start /pick-up L1
<65>
Start /pick-up L2
<66>
Start /pick-up L3
<67>
Start /pick-up N
<68>
General trip
<69>
Trip L1
<70>
Trip L2
<71>
Trip L3
<72>
Trip I>> (back-up operation)
<73>
Fault location X in ohms
<74>
Fault forward/line
<75>
Fault reverse/busbar
<76>
Teleprotection signal transmitted
<77>
Teleprotection signal received
<78>
Zone 1
<79>
Zone 2
<80>
Zone 3
<81>
Zone 4
<82>
Zone 5
<83>
Zone 6

Address Device Description
036 071
B-19

(continued)
INF
Description

Address Device Description
<84>
General starting
036 000
MAIN: General starting
<85>
Breaker failure
<86>
Trip measuring system L1
041 002
DIFF: Trip signal 1
<87>
041 003
DIFF: Trip signal 2
<88>
041 004
DIFF: Trip signal 3
<89>
Trip measuring system E
<90>
Trip I>
<91>
Trip I>>
<92>
Trip IN>
<93>
Trip IN>>
B-20

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<128>
CB on by AR
<129>
CB on by long-time AR
<130>
AR blocked

Address Description
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measured values in Monitor Direction
INF
Description
<144>
Measured value I
<145>
Measured values I, V
<146>
Measured values I, V, P, Q
<147>
Measured values IN, VEN
<148>
Measured values IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f

Address Description
B-21

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
B-22
INF
Description
<240>
Read headings of all defined groups
<241>
Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243>
Read directory of a single entry
<244>
Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245>
General interrogation of generic data
<249>
Write entry with confirmation
<250>
Write entry with execution
<251>
Write entry abort

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction

B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction
INF
Description
<0>
Initiation of general interrogation
<0>
Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction
INF
Description
<16>
Auto-recloser on/off
<17>
Teleprotection on/off
<18>
Protection on/off
003 030
<19>
LED reset
021 010
<23>1
Activate characteristic 1
003 060
<24>2
003 060
<25>3
003 060
<26>4
003 060
Switches
Switches
3
Switches
4
Switches
2

Address Description
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
PSS:
Param.subs.sel.USER
Param.subs.sel.USER
Param.subs.sel.USER
Param.subs.sel.USER
to 'Parameter set 1'

B-23

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction
B-24
INF
Description
<240>
Read headings of all defined groups
<241>
Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243>
Read directory of a single entry
<244>
Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245>
General interrogation of generic data
<248>
Write entry
<249>
Write entry with confirmation
<250>
Write entry with execution
<251>
Write entry abort

(continued)
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions

x
Test mode
Blocking of monitor direction
Disturbance data
Generic services
Private data
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can
be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words,
there is only one choice for each measured value.
Measured value
Max. MVAL =
nom. value multiplied by
1.2
or
2.4
Current A
Current B
Current C
Voltage A-G
Voltage B-G
Voltage C-G
Enabled power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
Voltage A-B
B-25
B-26
Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams
C 1 Location diagram for P631

C 1.1 40TE case, pin-terminal connection
C-1
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagram P631.403, part 1 of 3
C-1

(continued)
C-2
C-2

(continued)
C-3
The location diagram for the Ethernet module is shown in Figure C-48
C-3

(continued)
C 1.2 40TE case, ring-terminal connection
C-4
C-4
Terminal connection diagram for P631 in 40TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P631.404, part 1 of 3

(continued)
C-5
C-5

(continued)
C-6
C-6

(continued)

C-7
C-7

(continued)
C-8
C-8

(continued)
C-9
C-9

(continued)
C-10 Terminal connection diagram for P632 in 40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagram P632.403, part 4 of 6
C-10

(continued)
C-11

(continued)
C-12

(continued)
C-13 Terminal connection diagram for P632 in 84TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram P632.404, part 1 of 6
C-13

(continued)
C-14

(continued)
C-15

(continued)
C-16

(continued)
C-17

(continued)
C-18

(continued)

C-19

(continued)
C-20

(continued)
C-21

(continued)
C-22

(continued)
C-23

(continued)
C-24

(continued)
C-25

(continued)
C-26

(continued)
C-27

(continued)
C-28

(continued)
C-29

(continued)
C-30

(continued)
C-31

(continued)
C-32

(continued)
C-33

(continued)
C-34

(continued)
C-35

(continued)

C-36

(continued)
C-37

(continued)
C-38

(continued)
C-39

(continued)
C-40

(continued)
C-41

(continued)
C-42

(continued)
C-43

(continued)
C-44

(continued)
C-45

(continued)
C-46

(continued)
C-47

(continued)
C 5 Ethernet Module
ITEM DESIGN.
CONNECTOR
-X7
MEANING
ITEM
REFER.
STATU S
LOCATION
Comm. fiber interface Ethernet

(100 Base - FX)
REFER.
RX
X/Y
-U17
X/Y
-U18
X/Y
-U26
ST
ITEM DESIGN.
CONNECTOR
-X8
MEANING
ITEM
REFER.
STATUS
LOCATION

(100 Base - FX)
REFER.
TX
ST
ITEM DESIGN.
CONNECTOR
-X13
MEANING
ITEM
REFER.
STATUS
LOCATION

(100 Base - FX)
REFER.
RX
TX
SC
ITEM DESIGN.
CONNECTOR
-X12
MEANING
ITEM
REFER.
STATUS
LOCATION
Comm. interface Ethernet

(10 Base T / 100 Base TX)
REFER.
X // Y
-U25
RJ45
ITEM DESIGN.
CONNECTOR
-X10
MEANING
Comm. interface
Channel 2
ITEM
REFER.
STATUS
LOCATION
REFER.
X // Y
1
D2[R]
3
4
-U20
D1[T]
RS 485
: Alternative module
(see order inform.)
Px3x_Ethernet _02B_EN
C-48 Location diagram for the Ethernet module, applicable to:

40TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagrams: P631.403, P632.403, P633.404
40TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagram: P631.404
84TE case, pin-terminal connection, diagrams: P633.405, P634.403
84TE case, ring-terminal connection, diagrams: P632.404, P633.406, P634.404
C-48
Appendix D - Overview of Changes
Overview of Changes P63x

Version
Changes
P631-301-401601
P632-301-401601
P633-301-401/402601
Release: 15.01.01
Initial product release
P631-301-401601-701
P632-301-401601-701
P633-301-401/402601-701
Release: 03.04.01
Hardware
No changes
Diagram
No changes
Software
Device
Cyrillic characters supported

Analog (I/O) module Y supported
COMM1
Communication interfaces supported with protocols

selectable by switch-over
IRIG-B
Bug fixing for clock synchronization by IRIG-B signal

This version has no release!
P634-301-401601-702
Release: 17.05.01
P631-301-401601-703
P632-301-401601-703
P633-301-401/402601-703
P634-301-401601-703
Release: 02.08.01
P631-301-401601-704
P632-301-401601-704
P633-301-401/402601-704
P634-301-401601-704
Release: 17.12.01
Hardware
No changes
Diagram
No changes
Software
Device
Improved calibration algorithm
Hardware
No changes
Diagram
No changes
Software
Device
Device types with ring-terminal connection supported.
D- 1

(continued)
Version
P631-302-401/402 602
P632-302-401/402 602
P633-302-401/402/403 602
P634-302-401/402 602
Release: 25.01.02
Changes
Hardware
Designs with ring-terminal connection have been added.

New option with accelerated output module featuring 4 thyristors.
Diagram
Connection diagrams for device types fitted with ring-terminal connection

have been added. New option with accelerated output module is taken
into account.
Software
DVICE
Selection of spontaneous signals and setting of a 'Time-out' have been

added.
COMM1
The interface communication protocol 'COURIER' has been added.

Selection and testing of spontaneous signals have been added to the
interface communication protocols according to IEC 60870-5-103,
IEC 60870-5-101 and ILS-C.
COMM2
The new 'logical' communication interface 2 has been added.
MEASI
Display of the temperature as a per-unit value has been added.
MAIN
Separate setting for the secondary nominal current value of the system
transformers for measurement of phase currents and residual currents.
Assignment of the 'logical' communication interfaces COMM1 and
COMM2 to the communication channels of module A.
Grouping of the signals issued by measuring circuit monitoring (MCMON)
to form a multiple signal.
DIFF
The signals D I F F : I d > > t r i g g e r e d and

D IF F : I d > > > t r i g g e r e d have been added.
THRM1
to
THRM2
Modified texts for some of the settings.

Per-unit measured values have been added.
The signal T H R M x : N o t r e a d y has been added.
MCM_1
to
MCM_4
The measuring circuit monitoring functions are now available.
V/f
The overfluxing protection function is now available.
LOGIC
The number of binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T increased

from 16 to 40.
P631-302-401/402-602-705
Hardware
P632-302-401/402-602-705
P633-302-401/402/403-602-705 Diagram
P634-302-401/402-602-705
Release: 19.04.2002
D-2
No changes
No changes
Software
DVICE
Bug fixing:
The device was blocked following a start-up if either one of the
protections V<> or f<> were enabled, due to erroneous hardware selfidentification.
Version
Changes
P631-302-401/402-602-706
Hardware
P632-302-401/402-602-706
P633-302-401/402/403-602-706 Diagram
P634-302-401/402-602-706
No changes
Release: 06.06.2002
P631-302-401/402-603
P632-302-401/402-603
P633-302-401/402/403-603
P634-302-401/402-603
Release: 27.11.2002
No changes
Software
LOC
Bug fixing:
Two pixels in the Cyrillic characters were displayed incorrectly. This bug
affected only the language variant -805.
Hardware
No changes
Diagram
No changes
Software
DVICE
Bug fixing:
A device ID for the entry of an order extension number was missing.
DIFF
Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed.

Zero sequence current filtering for odd vector group IDs is improved.
Setting ranges of the tripping characteristic and of the unrestrained
differential element are extended.
The hysteresis of the tripping characteristic can now be disabled.
Definite-time trip delay is available.
REF_1
REF_2
REF_3
Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed.

Two new operating modes are available. One provides a high impedance
measuring principle.
The setting range of the unrestrained differential element is extended.
New tripping signals are provided for the application of the low
impedance operating mode with autotransformers.
IDMT1
IDMT2
IDMT3
Accuracy of tripping time is improved. Particularly the characteristic

'IEC extremely inverse' is now within the claimed tolerance range.
f<>
Measurements of minimum frequency during an underfrequency situation

and maximum frequency during an overfrequency situation have been
added.
V/f
Setting range of operate value V/f>> is extended.
D- 3

(continued)
Version
Changes
P634-303-403/404-604
This version is project-specific and only available on request!
Release: 09.10.2003
There is no software version 604 available for the devices P631, P632,
P633!
Hardware
The Ethernet communication module is available.
Diagram
The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces for the
Ethernet communication module:
P434.403 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
P434.404 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software
P631-303-403/404-605
P632-303-403/404-605
P633-303-404/405/406-605
P634-303-403/404-605
UCA2
Initial implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol.
Hardware
The new hardware variants now offer, per ordering option, additional
operating thresholds for the binary signal inputs:
(no order ext. No.)
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
(Order ext. No. 461)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
(Order ext. No. 462)
Installation of the standard variant is generally recommended if the
application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with
higher operate thresholds.
Release: 30.04.2004
The Ethernet communication module interface is now also available for

the P631, P632 and P633.
Diagram
The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces for the
Ethernet communication module:
P631 -403 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
P631 -404 (for 40TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software
UCA2
Implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol in the P631, P632

and P633.
Extension to all 4 devices of the expanded spontaneous signaling range
initially implemented in the P634-604. In addition, GOOSE messages
and fault transmission are now supported.
DIFF
D-4
The saturation discriminator was further improved.
Version
P631-304-403/404-606
P632-304-403/404-606
P633-304-404/405/406-606
P634-304-403/404-606
Changes
Hardware
Release: 09.05.2005
The new hardware variants now offer, per ordering option, additional
operating thresholds for the binary signal inputs:
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
(Order ext. No. -463)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
(Order ext. No. -464)
Installation of the standard variant is still generally recommended if the
application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with
higher operating thresholds.
An optional processor board with a DSP coprocessor is now available.
This coprocessor provides a better overall performance of the
supplementary functions of the device. It is the hardware requirement for
the use of the new current transformer supervision function (CTS).
Diagram
No changes
Software
Note:
COMM1
Bug fixing in the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol:
Software version -606 is compatible with all previous

hardware releases.
Support of the 7-byte time tag length has been corrected
(003 198 C O M M 1 : T i m e t a g l e n g t h = 7 byte).
Transmission of negative cyclic measured values has been
corrected.
Acknowledgment of the general scan command has been
corrected.
Signals in the general scan are now transmitted correctly without
a time tag.
Command rejections issued internally by the protection device
(between the processor module and communication module) are
no longer signaled by the communication interface.
Commands are now transmitted correctly, even when the ASDU
address length is 2 bytes
(003 193 C O M M 1 : A d d r e s s l e n g t h A S D U = 2 Byte).
Bug fixing in the COURIER protocol:

Upon activation of COURIER protocol a warm restart of the device was
initiated.
SFMON
Addendum:
As of version 605 the 'memory function' for the warning signal memory
may be set. After the associated timer stage has elapsed, a renewed
occurrence of a warning is processed the same way as if it where a first
occurrence.
FT_RC
The recording duration for binary tracks is now limited to 1 minute in

order to prevent recording of endless events.
D- 5

(continued)
Version
Changes
MAIN
Priority control of clock synchronization is now settable.

Positive- and negative-sequence currents from all ends are now
continuously calculated and displayed as measured operating data
(primary and per-unit values).
The functionality for the current summation was extended. Besides
summation of current values from 2 ends it is now also possible to sum
current values from 3 ends and to subtract current values from 2 ends.
SFMON
In the course of platform harmonization the configuration table of the

user defined alarm condition has been supplemented by the
instantaneous outputs 30...32 and the timed outputs 30...32 (t) of the
programmable LOGIC:
098 053
098 054
098 055
098 056
098 057
098 058
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
SFMON:
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
30
~ 042 092 L O G I C :
3 0 ( t ) ~ 042 092 L O G I C :
31
~ 042 092 L O G I C :
3 1 ( t ) ~ 042 092 L O G I C :
32
~ 042 092 L O G I C :
3 2 ( t ) ~ 042 092 L O G I C :
Output 30
Output 30 (t)
Output 31
Output 31 (t)
Output 32
Output 32 (t)
These signals can be used to create an alarm signal under complex

application conditions. This signaling has no influence on the device's
operation (i.e. no warm restart or blocking).
OL_RC,
FT_RC
DIFF
Overload and fault recording now have a joint and complete list of
possible entries (merged list of all previous signals).
In practice it became apparent that limitations with regard to possible
entries in both recording memories would bring no advantages but make
analyzing more difficult, as both recording memories could be open at
the same time (e.g. a thermal overload situation could lead to a loss of
insulation which would cause a fault).
The minimum setting value for the characteristic gradients m1 and m2
have been modified to 0.10 (previously 0.15).
The starting condition for the saturation discriminator was modified so
that the DIFF protection testing may now be carried out again with
conventional test sets (which do not provide correct transient signals).
Along with the new CTS function, an additional threshold, I d i f f > ( C T S ) ,
is provided in order to de-sensitize differential protection in case there is
a fault in the CT's secondary circuit. For more information about this
feature please refer to CTS description.
Bug fixing:
In some cases the overreaching inrush stabilization function did not
operate properly. In addition the signal from the inrush stabilization was
sometimes immediately reset when a differential protection trip was
issued.
REF_1
REF_2
REF_3
D-6
If the new current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the

ground fault differential protection function associated with the faulted
end was blocked when a CT fault was detected. For more information
about this feature please refer to CTS description.
Version
Changes
CTS
First implementation of a current transformer secondary wiring

supervision which operates fast enough to prevent differential protection
from tripping under load in case of a CT failure.
This function can only be used if the new processor board with DSP
coprocessor is fitted!
MCM_1
MCM_2
MCM_3
MCM_4
The existing measuring-circuit monitoring functions, based on the phase

currents per end, have been enhanced and can now be used to detect so
as to be able to use the function to detect a broken conductors (broken
conductor protection') on the primary CTs' primary sides.
D- 7

(continued)
Version
P631-305-403/404-610
P632-305-403/404-610
P633-305-404/405/406-610
P634-305-403/404-610
Changes
Hardware
No changes at this time.

During the P63x 610's release proceedings, a new option with the
order extension number -937 for the Ethernet module was released and
therefore the hardware version changes from -304 to -305.
Release: June 2006

Diagram
No changes
Software
Note:
IEC
GOOSE
GSSE
Implementation of the new communication protocol per IEC 61850.
UCA2
This firmware does not support the UCA2 communication protocol.
MAIN
The new phase reversal function is intended to protect machines in a

pumped- storage power stations that are operated either as motors or
generators, depending on the demand. In such applications it is
common practice to swap two phases in order to facilitate the pumping
operation. Thanks to this phase reversal function, the P63x can maintain
correct operation of all protection functions even when the phase
reversal switch is inside the protected zone.
DIFF
Selection of the vector groups may now be set individually in 4 parameter

subsets.
Software version -610 is fully compatible with all previous

hardware versions.
Bug fixing:
The trip signals issued by the 3 measuring systems
(D I F F : T r i p s i g n a l n , with n = 1, 2, or 3) were previously issued
instantly, regardless of the set time-delays.
(Note: D IFF : T r i p s i g n a l was issued correctly, including the timedelay.)
IDMTn
D-8
Improved accuracy, particularly for the 'IEC extremely inverse'

characteristic.
35 rue Joseph Monier

92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone:
Fax:
+33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
+33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publication: P63x/EN M/Ca4 Version: -610
Publishing: Schneider Electric

11/2010
2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
Customer Care Centre
2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone:
Fax:
+33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
+33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publication: P63x/EN M/Aq6 Version: -610 -611 -620 -621 -622 -630, Volume 1
Publishing: Schneider Electric

06/2011

P63x EN M Aq6 610-622-630 Vol 1 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

P63x EN M Aq6 610-622-630 Vol 1 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MiCOM

Modifications After Going to Press

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

(Function Group COMM2)

(Function Group GOOSE)

(Function Group GSSE)

(Function Group MEASI)

(Function Group OUTP)

(Function Group MEASO)

(Function Group LED)

(Function Group MAIN)

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Limit Value Monitoring

(Function Group PSS)

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Installation and Connection

Local Control Panel

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Information and Control Functions

Accessories and Spare Parts

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

1 Application and Scope

Application and Scope

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

> Three-stage differential protection

Ground differential protection (Br:

Definite-time overcurrent protection

Inverse-time overcurrent protection

Thermal overload protection

Current transformer supervision

Limit value monitoring

IEC, GOOSE, GSSE

IEC 61850 communications protocol

Binary signal inputs / Output relays (maximum number)

Measured Value Functions

Analog input / output

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Parameter subset selection

Operating data recording

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

to SCADA / Substation control / RTU / Modem ...

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Inputs and outputs

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Control and display

Local control panel

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610

Application and Scope

Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1

Local control panel

P63X/EN M/Ba4 // AFSV.12.09701 D /// P631-305-403/404-610 // P632-305-403/404-610 // P633-305-404/405/406-610 // P634-305-403/404-610